JP2013162833A - Game system and game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game system capable of performing display having a high performance effect in a game machine and also capable of displaying required game information timely in the game machine, and the game machine.SOLUTION: An indicator 54 is provided in a game machine in addition to a variable display device 278, and normally a game performance in linking with the variable display device 278 is displayed on the indicator 54. When the number of game balls becomes not larger than a predetermined number, the game information is displayed on the indicator 54 by display control at a side of a card unit.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that gives a predetermined gaming point when a prize is generated, and a game that is communicably connected to the gaming machine and enables a game on the gaming machine using a gaming value owned by the player. The present invention relates to a gaming system including a gaming device and the gaming machine.

  Conventionally, for example, a gaming device that accepts and processes a recording medium such as a gaming card is communicably connected to the gaming machine, and is owned by the player specified by the recording information of the recording medium received by the gaming device. There was one configured to allow a game to be played by a gaming machine using a gaming value.

  In the device described in Patent Document 1, an information display device that displays various types of information according to the control of the gaming device is provided in the gaming device with respect to such a conventional gaming machine and gaming device (paragraph). [0020] [0023] [0025] [0026]).

  On the other hand, the one described in Patent Document 2 is provided with a display unit in an enclosed game machine, and no display unit is provided for a gaming device, and various information (for example, holding balls) according to the control of the gaming device. Number, money amount information, storage ball information, etc.) are displayed on the display unit of the enclosed game machine (paragraphs [0032] to [0034] [0045] [0046]).

JP-A-2005-27857 JP 2007-289248 A

  If an information display device is provided on the gaming device side as described in Patent Document 1, there is a drawback that it is difficult for a player who is playing a game on a gaming machine to view display information. On the other hand, as described in Patent Document 2, it is not always desirable to provide a display unit only for displaying money amount information, accumulated ball information, etc. on the gaming machine side in terms of cost effectiveness.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of the actual situation, and its purpose is for a game machine capable of displaying necessary game information on a gaming machine in a timely manner while enabling a highly effective display on the gaming machine. It is to provide a system and a gaming machine.

(1) The present invention relates to a gaming machine (P 2) that gives a predetermined gaming point when a winning occurs and is connected to the gaming machine so as to be able to communicate with it. And a gaming device (CU3) that enables gaming on the gaming machine using the gaming machine,
The gaming machine is
A variable display unit (variable display unit of the variable display device 278) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information;
Game control means (main control unit 161) that can be controlled to a state advantageous to the player (big hit state) when the result of the variable display unit becomes a specific display result (both eyes);
An effect display unit (display device 54) for displaying effect information related to the display of the variable display unit (such as the reach screen of patterns 3 and 4 in FIG. 9);
The game device displays the game information on the effect display unit when a condition for displaying game information different from the effect information on the effect display unit is satisfied (the remaining number of game points is 30 or less). Display control means (display control unit 350; the display control signal from the display control unit 350 is input to the switching circuit 141 in FIG. 6, YES in S1421 in FIG. 7).

  According to such a configuration, since the gaming machine includes the effect display unit for displaying the effect information related to the display of the variable display unit, it is possible to provide a game with high effect. In addition, when the condition for displaying the game information on the effect display unit is established, display control for displaying the game information on the effect display unit is executed by the game device. The effect display unit can be used not only for game effects but also for display of game information by the game device, and the display control burden of the gaming machine accompanying the display of game information can be reduced.

(2) The present invention provides a gaming device (CU3) for giving a predetermined game point upon occurrence of a winning and enabling a game using a player's own gaming value (card balance, savings, etc.) A gaming machine (P stand 2) that is communicably connected,
A variable display unit (variable display unit of the variable display device 278) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information;
Game control means (main control unit 161) that can be controlled to a state advantageous to the player (big hit state) when the result of the variable display unit becomes a specific display result (both eyes);
An effect display unit (display device 54) for displaying effect information related to the display of the variable display unit (such as the reach screen of patterns 3 and 4 in FIG. 9);
The effect display unit displays the game information by the game device on the effect display unit when a condition for displaying game information different from the effect information is satisfied (the remaining number of game points is 30 or less). When the display control is executed, the game information can be displayed on the effect display unit (see FIG. 9).

  According to such a configuration, since the gaming machine includes the effect display unit for displaying the effect information related to the display of the variable display unit, it is possible to provide a game with a high effect. Moreover, when the condition for displaying the game information on the effect display unit is established, the game information is displayed on the effect display unit. Therefore, when the condition is established, the effect display unit is displayed only for the game effect. In addition, it can be used for display of game information by the game device, and the display control burden of the gaming machine accompanying display of the game information can be reduced.

(3) In the gaming system according to (1),
Condition success / failure determining means (S1421 in FIG. 7) for determining success or failure of conditions for displaying game information different from the effect information on the effect display unit is included.

  According to such a configuration, success or failure of the condition for displaying game information is determined, and when it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the game information is displayed on the effect display unit. The condition establishment determining means may be provided on the gaming machine side or on the gaming device side.

(4) In the gaming system described in (3),
The condition success / failure determination means determines that the condition is satisfied when the game points become a predetermined number or less (see FIG. 7),
When the condition success / failure determination means determines that the condition is satisfied, the display control means performs display control for displaying the game points that are equal to or less than the predetermined number on the effect display unit (FIG. 9). (See Pattern 3 and Pattern 4).

  According to such a configuration, if the number of game points is equal to or less than a predetermined number, game points are displayed on the effect display unit, so that the player can continue the game as it is without noticing the state where there are few remaining game points. Can be prevented.

(5) In the gaming system according to (3) or (4),
Further comprising conversion means for converting predetermined points into the game points,
The condition success / failure determination means determines that the condition is satisfied when the score is equal to or less than a predetermined number (see FIG. 7).
The display control execution means executes display control for displaying the score that has become the predetermined number or less on the effect display unit when the condition success / failure determination means determines that the condition is satisfied (“holding”). "The remaining points are displayed").

  According to such a configuration, if the score is equal to or less than the predetermined number, the score is displayed on the effect display unit, so that the player can continue the game as it is without noticing the state where the score is low. Can be prevented.

(6) In the gaming system according to any one of (3) to (5), the gaming value is stored when a recording medium (gaming card) on which information capable of specifying the gaming value is recorded is received. Game value storage means (storage area “balance” on the CU side in FIG. 12),
Game value conversion means (lending button 321) for converting the game value into the game points;
The condition success / failure determining means determines that the condition is satisfied when the value of the gaming value is equal to or less than a predetermined value (see FIG. 7).
The display control execution means executes display control for displaying the gaming value that has become equal to or smaller than the predetermined size on the effect display unit when the condition success / failure determination means determines that the condition is satisfied. (The message “Balance balance is small” is displayed.)

  According to such a configuration, the game value is displayed on the effect display section when the game value is equal to or less than a predetermined value, so that the player can continue to play the game without noticing that the game value is low. Can be prevented.

  (7) In the gaming system according to any one of (3) to (6), the effect display unit includes the effect information in accordance with execution of display control for displaying the game information on the effect display unit. In addition, the game information is displayed (see pattern 4 in FIG. 9).

  According to such a configuration, since the game information is displayed without completely disappearing the displayed performance information, the performance effect by the performance information can be maintained.

  (8) In the gaming system according to any one of (3) to (6), the effect display unit includes the effect information in accordance with execution of display control for displaying the game information on the effect display unit. The game information is displayed instead (see pattern 3 in FIG. 9).

  According to such a configuration, the game information is displayed instead of the effect information that has been displayed, so that it is possible to make the player pay attention to the switched and displayed game information.

(9) In the gaming system according to (1) (3) to (8),
The gaming machine is
Game point storage means for storing the game points (game ball counter in FIG. 12);
A game point display section (game ball number display 29);
Game point display control means (main control part 161) for displaying the game points on the game point display part based on the storage of the game point storage part.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine includes the gaming point display unit, and the display control is performed by the gaming machine that stores the gaming point and relates to the variation of the gaming point. Therefore, the gaming point is used in the game. When subtracted or added by game, the updated game point can be immediately reflected on the game point display unit.

It is a front view which shows a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view for demonstrating the circulation mechanism of a game ball. It is a rear view for demonstrating the circulation mechanism of a game ball. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit used for a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram for demonstrating display control of a game ball number display and a display. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the modification of the display control of a game ball number display and a display. It is a figure for demonstrating the display control example (patterns 1 and 2) of a display device (touch panel). It is a figure for demonstrating the display control example (pattern 3, 4) of a display device (touch panel). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the notification process when abnormality is detected as a result of mutual authentication. It is a figure which shows the structure of the flame | frame used by the communication performed between a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in the card unit side and the pachinko machine side, and its transmission / reception. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response which are transmitted / received between a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a status information request | requirement. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a CU state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a status information response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a status information response. It is explanatory drawing explaining the meaning of various numbers of balls, and the content of the confirmation point. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of each bit of the game machine state 1. FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of each bit of the game machine state 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of each bit of the game stand state 3. FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of the classification information in game information. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of the prize ball information in game information. It is the figure explaining in more detail the error content of a game machine error state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the card insertion notification. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a card insertion response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the card return notification. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a card return response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a recovery request. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the recovery response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a recovery detailed request | requirement. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the recovery process of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a detailed recovery response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a communication start request | requirement. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a communication start response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the communication termination request. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the communication end response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a communication test request | requirement. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a communication test response. It is a figure which shows the aspect of transmission / reception of the command and response between a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when a communication disconnection is detected by the card unit side. It is a figure which shows an example of a process at the time of detecting a communication disconnection by the pachinko machine side. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the pachinko machine at the time of power activation. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a card is inserted in a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the pachinko machine at the time of money_receiving | payment to the inserted card | curd. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when lending a ball from the prepaid balance of the inserted card. Processing when the number of game balls decreases on the P platform side when an addition request occurs will be described. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when paying out a lot of balls and paying out a stored ball. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when subtracting a part of game ball. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when subtracting all the game balls. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when counting game balls automatically when leaving a seat. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when returning the inserted card | curd. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine in case a count operation is prompted when the return operation of the inserted card is detected. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when collect | recovering the inserted card | curd automatically. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the pachinko machine in a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when counting operation is detected during a game. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication circuit disconnection before transmitting a command from a card unit to a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication circuit disconnection, and the command from a card unit to a pachinko machine has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication circuit disconnection, and the response from a pachinko machine to a card unit has not yet reached. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication circuit disconnection, and the command of the addition request from a card unit to a pachinko machine has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication circuit disconnection, and the response of the addition response from a pachinko machine to a card unit has not reached | attained. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing when power is disconnected and a communication circuit is disconnected before transmitting a command from the card unit to the pachinko machine, and a communication partner after restoration is inconsistent. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication circuit disconnection, and a command from the card unit to the pachinko machine has not yet reached, and communication partners after restoration do not match. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication circuit disconnection, and a response from the pachinko machine to the card unit has not yet reached, and communication partners after restoration do not match. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication circuit disconnection, and an addition request command from the card unit to the pachinko machine has not yet reached, and the communication counterparts after restoration do not match. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is a power interruption and a communication circuit disconnection and the response of the addition response from the pachinko machine to the card unit has not yet reached, and the communication counterpart after the restoration is inconsistent. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing when there is a power interruption and a communication circuit disconnection, and an addition request command from the card unit to the pachinko machine has not yet reached, and the communication counterparts after recovery match. It is a figure which shows an example of a process at the time of the game ball addition result abnormality at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and saving ball payout. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of resending the game ball | bowl addition result at the time of ball lending, possession ball payout, and storage ball payout. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when the response from a pachinko machine to the card unit has not yet reached. It is a figure which shows an example of the resending process of the command from a card unit to a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the possession ball sharing process performed between a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the wagon service process performed between a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is the figure which showed the example of a combination of the structure of the system for games. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process of the system for games when a game ball is more than predetermined number. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the operation process of a count button. It is a figure which shows an example of the display of count operation. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the front door of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in each of a card unit and a slot machine, and its transmission / reception aspect.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
<Configuration of pachinko machine>
First, the configuration of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Each game island (not shown) arranged in the game hall (hall) has an enclosed circulation pachinko machine (hereinafter abbreviated as a game machine, pachinko machine, or P machine) 2 as an example of a game machine. Has been. Note that a card unit (hereinafter also abbreviated as CU) 3 as an example of a gaming device is installed in a one-to-one correspondence with the pachinko machine 2 at a side position on a predetermined side of the pachinko machine 2. Yes.

  The pachinko machine 2 encloses a pachinko ball as an example of a game medium inside, and when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the firing motor 18 (see FIG. 2) is driven to make one shot of the enclosed ball. The game board 26 is configured so that it can be played one by one in the game area 27 in front of the game board 26. Specifically, a touch sensor is provided around the batting operation handle 25, and the player's hand touches the touch sensor while the player is operating the batting operation handle 25, and the player's hand. Is detected by the touch sensor, and the firing motor 18 is driven. In this state, the hitting momentum is adjusted in accordance with the amount of rotation of the hitting operation handle 25 by the player, and the ball is shot into the game area 27.

  The pachinko machine 2 shown in FIG. 1 is a so-called first type of pachinko machine, and a variable display device (also referred to as a special symbol) 278 is provided in the center of the game area 27. In addition, the game area 27 is provided with a plurality of types of winning holes through which the inserted pachinko balls can be won. In the game area 27 shown in FIG. 1, one large winning opening (variable winning ball apparatus) 271, three normal winning holes 272, 273, 274 and three start winning holes 275, 276, 277 are shown. ing. In particular, the start winning opening 276 is configured by an electric tulip that can be changed between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player. .

  The variable display device 278 includes a variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (symbols), and based on the detection signals of the start winning balls won in each start winning opening 275, 276, 277. Start variable display of multiple types of identification information. When the display result of the variable display device is a combination of specific identification information (for example, a glance), a big hit state is established and the big prize opening 271 is opened.

  In addition, since the display result of the variable display device is a combination of predetermined special identification information (for example, a combination of probability variation symbols such as 777) out of a combination of jackpot symbols (grooves), the probability variation big hit state is A probability variation state (probability variation state) in which the occurrence probability of the jackpot is improved after the occurrence of the jackpot state is generated.

  The pachinko balls that have been driven into the game area 27 are won at any of the winning openings or are collected at the out opening 145 (see FIG. 2) without winning. The pachinko balls won in the winning opening and the pachinko balls collected in the out mouth 145 are returned again to the hitting ball launch position through the collection path in the pachinko machine 2. Then, when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the pachinko ball at the hitting position is again shot into the game area 27.

  A display 54 is provided at a position below the game area 27 in the pachinko machine 2. The display 54 is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and displays various effect images linked to the display of the points, the remaining card amount, or the variable display device 278 to the player.

  Further, a counting button 28 is provided at the left position of the hitting operation handle 25 in the pachinko machine 2 for counting the game balls to the holding balls. As will be described in detail later, when the count button 28 is pressed once, for example, 100 balls are counted from the game balls to the holding balls, and when pressed for a long period of time (long press), the game balls currently held are considered. Then, the number of game balls is counted from the number of balls corresponding to the number of balls pressed. When the count button 28 is pressed once, all the game balls currently owned by the player are counted regardless of the pressing time (whether or not the button is pressed long). Good.

  Thus, since the counting button 28 is provided on the P table side, the operability of the player sitting facing the P table can be improved as compared with the case where the counting button 28 is provided on the CU side.

  A game ball number display 29 for displaying the number of game balls is provided at the upper right of the counting button 28. The game ball number display 29 is a 7-segment display. The game ball number display 29 may be configured by a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, or other display.

<Configuration of card unit>
Next, the configuration of the card unit according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This card unit 3 is a visitor card (also referred to as a general card) having a prepaid function, which is a game recording medium issued to a general player who has not registered as a member, or a member who has registered as a member in the game hall. Receive a membership card, which is a game recording medium issued to a player. Visitor cards and membership cards are composed of IC cards.

  The card unit 3 that has received these cards has a function of converting the game value (for example, the remaining card amount, the number of balls, or the number of accumulated balls) owned by the player specified by the record information of the card into “game ball data”. Have In the pachinko machine 2, a ball game equivalent to the number of balls specified by the data of game balls is made possible. That is, “game ball data” is data indicating the number of remaining fireable shots. In the following description, “game ball data” is simply referred to as “game ball” in the same manner as a stored ball and a holding ball.

  On the front side of the card unit 3, a bill insertion slot 302 for inserting bills, a protruding portion 305 formed to project forward from the front side of the device, and a card insertion / discharge port for inserting a membership card or a visitor card 309 etc. are provided. A membership card or a visitor card inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309 is received by a card reader / writer (not shown), and information recorded on the card is read.

  In the protrusion 305 described above, on the surface facing the player, the display 312 and the membership card ID recorded on the membership card (also simply referred to as the card ID) and the membership card when the membership card is received. An IR (Infrared) photosensitive unit 320 receives an infrared signal from a replay button 319 for executing a replay game using the number of stored balls specified by the ID and a remote control (not shown) possessed by an attendant of the game hall. An IR light receiving unit that converts the signal into an electronic signal and outputs it is provided.

  The display 312 displays the prepaid balance recorded on the inserted game recording medium (card) (also referred to as the card balance or simply the balance), but can display the number of game balls and various other information. In addition, the surface is configured with a transparent touch panel, and various operations can be input by touching various display items displayed on the display unit of the display 312 with a finger.

  When the replay button 319 is operated, if the number of possessed balls acquired by the player is recorded on the inserted card, a part of the number of possessed balls is withdrawn and converted into a game ball, and the converted game ball is converted into a converted game ball. Based on this, it is possible to play a game with the pachinko machine 2. On the other hand, if the inserted card is a membership card and the number of possession balls is not recorded and the storage ball is recorded in the hall management computer, etc., a part of the storage ball is withdrawn and becomes a game ball. It is converted and the game by the pachinko machine 2 becomes possible. That is, when both the stored ball and the holding point are stored in association with the inserted card, the holding ball is withdrawn preferentially. In addition to the replay button 319, a dedicated ball payout button for withdrawing the possession ball may be provided, and the replay button 319 may be a button dedicated to withdrawal of the stored ball.

  Here, the “storing ball” is a game medium deposited in a game hall, and is generally managed by a hall management computer or other management computer installed in the game hall.

  “Number of possessed balls” is the number of balls that the player possesses as a result of the player playing the game with the gaming machine on the card, and the number of balls that have not yet been deposited in the game hall That is. Generally, the number of balls that the player has acquired on the day of the game hall is called “mochidama”, and the number of balls that the player has acquired before the previous day and that has been deposited in the amusement hall is “save ball”. Say.

  The “game ball” is data on the number of balls that can be fired by the gaming machine. As already described, this data is generated in exchange for the withdrawal of the remaining amount of the prepaid card, the holding ball, or the stored ball.

  Note that the number of possessed balls may be managed by a management device for managing the number of possessed balls set in the game hall. In short, the difference between “sold balls” and “mochidama” is the number of balls that have been deposited in the amusement hall as a result of a storage operation for depositing in the amusement hall, or is still deposited in the amusement hall. It is a point whether it is the number of balls of the stage which is not.

  In this embodiment, the stored ball data is not recorded directly on the member card, but is stored in association with the member card number in a hall server installed in a game hall such as a hall management computer, and the corresponding stored ball is stored based on the member card number. It is configured to be searchable. On the other hand, Mochitama records directly on the card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both may be stored in the hall server in association with the card number. In the case of a visitor card, Mochitama is recorded directly on the visitor card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball may be stored in the hall server in association with the card number. When storing in the hall server in association with the card number, data that can specify the time stored in the hall server may be written in the card (member card, visitor card) and discharged. Also, the prepaid balance is written directly on a card (member card, visitor card) and discharged.

  Note that the timing for storing the holding ball in a card (member card, visitor card) or hall server is stored in a fixed period, for example, in real time every time the counting button 28 is operated and the counting process is performed. Or when storing the card in a batch.

  The banknote inserted into the banknote insertion slot 302 is taken in by a currency discriminator (not shown), and its authenticity and banknote type are identified.

  A ball lending button (also referred to as a lending button) 321 and a return button 322 are further provided on the front side of the card unit 3. The ball lending button 321 is a button for performing an operation (conversion operation to a game ball) for withdrawing the remaining amount recorded on the inserted card and using it in a game by the pachinko machine 2. The return button 322 is operated when the player finishes the game, and the number of game balls determined at the end of the game on the inserted card (the number of balls at the time of card insertion-the number of conversions to game balls + counting operation) This is an operation button for memorizing and discharging the number of possessed balls counted by.

<Pachinko ball circulation route>
2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 2, FIG. 3 is a front view for explaining the circulation mechanism of the game balls, and FIG. 4 is a rear view for explaining the circulation mechanism of the game balls. With reference to FIG. 2 to FIG. 4, the circulation path of the enclosed circulation type pachinko balls will be mainly described.

  The game board holding frame 95 of the pachinko machine 2 is provided with a rotation lever 100 for attaching the game board. By rotating the rotation lever 100, the game board 26 can be attached and detached. The pachinko machine 2 according to the present embodiment can be divided into a gaming board 26 and other gaming machine frames as described above. In particular, the gaming board 26 is different for each model of pachinko machine developed by each company, while the gaming machine frame is a common common frame regardless of the model. For this reason, it is sufficient for the game store to replace only the game board when replacing a new stand.

  All winning balls that are won from a winning opening provided in the game area 27, a variable winning ball apparatus, etc. are collected by the winning ball collecting cover member 144 and guided to the collection ball passing path 901. On the other hand, the out ball that has entered the out port 145 also flows down the out ball flow path 702. The out ball flow path 702 is provided with an out ball detection switch 701, and a ball flowing down the out ball flow path 702 is detected.

  On the other hand, the foul balls flow down the foul ball return path 151 and flow down from the foul ball return port 150 through the foul ball return path 902 and the recovery ball passage path 901. In the middle of the foul ball return path 151, a foul ball detection switch 33 for detecting a foul ball flowing down is provided.

  The out ball flowing down the out ball flow path 702 enters the recovery ball passage path 901, flows down together with the winning ball and the foul ball, and enters the ball collection path 189. A firing ball detection switch 903 is provided in the middle of the recovery ball passage route, and all balls in which the winning ball, the out ball and the foul ball merge are detected.

  Further, a 50 replenishment detection switch (also referred to as a game ball shortage detection switch) 904 is provided at an intermediate position on the downstream side of the shot ball detection switch 903. The 50 replenishment detection switch 904 is for detecting whether or not the number of pachinko balls built in the pachinko machine 2 has reached a predetermined number (50). On the other hand, the above-mentioned shot ball detection switch 903 collects and detects all the pachinko balls that have been shot into the game area 27, and the number of shot balls that have been shot into the game area 27 and the number of shot balls that have been shot. When the number of pachinko balls detected by the detection switch 903 becomes equal, it is detected that all the pachinko balls that have been driven into the game area 27 have been collected.

  The fired ball detection switch 903 having such a role is also used for detecting that the number of encapsulated balls built in the pachinko machine 2 exceeds a predetermined number (50). That is, when a predetermined number (50) of pachinko balls are enclosed in the pachinko machine 2, the last 50th pachinko balls of the enclosed balls that are stopped in a non-operating state in which no game is being performed are displayed. The position is configured to be located between the 50 replenishment detection switch 904 and the firing ball detection switch 903.

  As a result, when more than a predetermined number (50) of pachinko balls are enclosed in the pachinko machine 2, the pachinko balls that are parked in a state where they are not being played will exceed the detection position of the firing ball detection switch 903. The fired ball detection switch 903 is always in a ball detection state, thereby making it possible to detect that the number of encapsulated balls is too large. On the other hand, if the number of encapsulated balls is less than the predetermined number (50), the pachinko balls that are parked in the non-game state are located downstream of the detection position of the 50 replenishment detection switch 904, and the replenishment 50 The individual detection switch 904 enters a non-detection state where no ball is detected. As a result, it is possible to detect that the number of encapsulated balls is too smaller than the predetermined number (50).

  The pachinko balls that have flowed down the ball collection path 189 enter a transport device 190 for transporting the pachinko balls upward. The conveyance device 190 includes a conveyance screw 190b that is rotated by the conveyance motor 40, and the pachinko ball is conveyed upward by the rotation of the conveyance screw 190b. The conveying device 190 is further provided with a pair of left and right polishing members 913 that polish the pachinko balls by contacting the pachinko balls in the middle of conveyance, and the surface of the pachinko balls is polished while being conveyed upward. The The polishing member 913 is rotated by the driving force of the polishing motor 193a to polish the pachinko balls.

  A ball raising switch (lower) 41b is provided in the vicinity of the pachinko ball entrance of the transport device 190, and a pachinko ball entering the transport device 190 is detected. On the other hand, a pachinko ball conveyed upward by the conveying device 190 and discharged from the conveying device 190 is detected by a ball raising switch (upper) 41a. The detected pachinko ball flows down to the rectifier 916. The rectifier 916 is for supplying pachinko balls one by one to the ball launch position. When the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the firing motor 18 is driven and the hitting hammer 920 is intermittently swung. One pachinko ball that has been supplied to the launch position by the rectifier 916 is ejected by the hitting hammer 920 and the pachinko ball is driven into the game area 27.

  The rectifier 916 is provided with a rectifier solenoid 916a and a ball feed member 916b that swings up and down by the driving force of the rectifier solenoid 916a in order to supply pachinko balls one by one to the ball firing positions by the hitting hammer 920. Yes. The ball feeding member 916b has a U-shaped shape as shown in FIG. 2, and receives one pachinko ball that has flowed down. In this state, the rectifier solenoid 916a is excited and the ball is driven by its driving force. The feed member 916b swings downward. Then, the received pachinko ball is supplied to the ball hitting position. When the hitting hammer 920 bounces the supplied pachinko ball, the pachinko ball is driven into the game area 27.

  The hitting hammer 920 is biased by a spring in the hitting direction of the hitting ball, and the hitting hammer 920 is moved in the direction opposite to the hitting direction (back swing direction) by the action of a cam that is rotated by the driving force of the firing motor 18. It is swung. Then, when the predetermined amount of rocking is performed, the cam action is released and the hitting hammer 920 is rocked in the driving direction by the biasing force of the spring, so that the pachinko ball is bullet-launched. The spring urging in the hitting direction can be adjusted by rotating the hitting operation handle 25 by the player, whereby the hitting momentum can be adjusted.

  A ball removal portion 915 is provided between the rectifier 916 and the ball raising switch (upper) 41a. The ball removal portion 915 is provided with a ball removal motor 915a. When a game attendant operates a ball removal switch 922 provided on the relay board 921, the ball removal motor 915a rotates by a predetermined amount, and the enclosed ball can be extracted out of the path.

  The ball raising switch (upper) 41 a is used for the on / off control of the conveyance motor 40 by the detection signal. In the state where the hitting operation by the hitting operation handle 25 is not performed and the hitting ball is not shot, the rectifier 916 does not perform the ball feeding operation, and therefore, the pachinko balls conveyed upward by the conveying device 190 flow down at the position of the rectifier 916. Is stopped and stopped. When the pachinko ball to be stopped reaches the detection position of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a, a ball detection signal is constantly output from the ball raising switch (upper) 41a. When the continuous output state of such a ball detection signal continues for a predetermined time (for example, several milliseconds), the driving of the transport motor 40 is stopped and the transport of the ball upward is stopped.

  On the other hand, when the player rotates the hitting operation handle 25 to fire the hitting ball, the rectifier 916 executes a ball feeding operation. As a result, the ball that has stopped and stopped at the rectifier 916 is stopped. The ball detection signal is not output from the ball raising switch (upper) 41a. Then, the drive of the conveyance motor 40 is started and a ball is conveyed. Since the number of balls raised per unit time by driving the conveyance motor 40 is controlled to be larger than the number of balls firing per unit time by driving the firing motor 18, the driving of the conveyance motor 40 is started. When a little time has passed, the ball raising switch (upper) 41a again outputs a ball detection signal, and the driving of the carry motor 40 is stopped. However, since the hitting of the hit ball continues, the ball detection signal is not output again from the ball raising switch (upper) 41a. Then, the drive of the conveyance motor 40 is started and a ball is conveyed. In the operating state in which the player is performing the hitting operation, the driving and stopping of the transport motor 40 are repeated.

  The detection of game ball launching, which detects that the number of game balls has been fired into the game area 27, is detected by the change of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a from on to off. This detection is detected by a port input on the payout control board 17 (see FIG. 5) on which the payout control unit 171 is provided. Based on this detection, the payout control unit 171 subtracts “1” from the number of game balls. To do.

  The firing motor 18 is provided with a firing motor origin sensor (not shown). This firing motor origin sensor is for stopping the firing motor 18 at a predetermined origin position. The firing motor 18 stops when the player releases his / her hand from a touch link (not shown) provided on the hitting operation handle 25, and when the firing motor origin sensor detects the origin of the firing motor 18 at the time of the stop. To control the firing motor 18 to stop.

  In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 2 is turned on, if the launch motor 18 is deviated from the origin position and the output of the launch motor origin sensor 37 is OFF, the launch motor 18 is rotated forward depending on the current position of the launch motor 18. Alternatively, control is performed to reverse the position and move the stop position of the firing motor 18 to the origin without firing the pachinko ball. The current stop position of the firing motor 18 is compared with the position of the origin to determine whether the firing motor 18 is rotated in the forward direction or the reverse direction in the direction of rotation close to the origin position. You may make it move a stop position to an origin by carrying out rotation control to.

  Similarly, a ball removal motor origin sensor (not shown) is provided in the ball removal motor 915a, and the ball removal motor 915a is controlled to stop at the origin position.

  The above-described winning ball detection switch, 50 replenishment detection switch 904, ball raising switch (upper) 41a, ball raising switch (lower) 41b, foul ball detection switch 33, and out ball detection switch 701 are electrostatic capacitances due to the passage of balls. It consists of proximity switches that detect changes in On the other hand, only the shot ball detection switch 903 is configured by a photosensor of a light projecting / receiving type. In amusement halls, there are cases where fraudulent acts using radio waves are performed in which fraudulent radio waves are transmitted to misdetect the ball detection switch. When such an improper radio wave is transmitted, the proximity switch may be erroneously detected, but the photosensor has no risk of erroneous detection.

  As a result, when a fraudulent act of transmitting an improper radio wave occurs, the winning ball detection switch, the foul ball detection switch 33, and the out ball detection switch 701, which are configured by proximity switches, output detection signals associated with erroneous detection. However, since there is no risk of erroneous detection of the fired ball detection switch 903 formed of a photosensor, the total number of detected balls and the fired ball of the foul ball detection switch 33, the out ball detection switch 701, and the winning ball detection switch. A wrinkle occurs between the number of balls detected by the detection switch 903. As a result, fraudulent acts caused by radio waves can be monitored. It should be noted that the winning ball detection switch, the 50 replenishment detection switch 904, the ball raising switch (upper) 41a, the ball raising switch (lower) 41b, the foul ball detection switch 33, the out ball detection switch 701, and the shot ball detection switch 903 are provided. , All may be composed of the same type of switch.

<Configuration of card unit and pachinko machine>
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the card unit 3 and the pachinko machine 2. With reference to FIG. 5, the outline of the control circuit of the card unit 3 and the pachinko machine 2 will be described.

  The card unit 3 is provided with a CU control unit 323 composed of a microcomputer or the like. The CU control unit 323 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Member) storing a program for operating the CPU, control data, and the like, and a RAM ( Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

  The CU control unit 323 is provided with an external communication unit (not shown) for communicating with a hall management computer and a hall server 801 (see FIG. 10) for security management, and the pachinko machine 2 A security board 325 for communicating with the payout control board 17 while ensuring security is provided. The card unit 3 is provided with a connection part (not shown) to the pachinko machine 2 side, and the pachinko machine 2 is provided with a connection part (not shown) to the card unit 3 side. These connection parts are constituted by connectors, for example.

  The security board 325 on the CU side and the payout control board 17 on the P platform side are communicably connected via this connector and connection wiring. The security board 325 is provided with a communication control IC 325a for controlling communication between the security board 325 and the payout control board 17, and a security chip (SC) 325b for monitoring the security of the pachinko machine 2. The SC 325b further includes a fraud detection unit 1325. The fraud detection unit 1325 performs fraud detection by monitoring the game ball addition request information notified from the CU control unit 323 to the P-unit 2, and manages the key when fraud is detected. The server 800 (see FIG. 10) is notified. Further, the setting value (constant) for fraud detection is notified from the key management server 800 as board control information.

  The authenticity and type of the banknote are identified by the above-described money identifier, and the identification result signal is input to the CU control unit 323. When the IR photosensitive unit 320 receives infrared rays emitted from a remote controller owned by a game attendant, the received light signal is input to the CU control unit 323. The card reader / writer reads the recorded information of the inserted card, and the read information is input to the CU control unit 323. At the same time, the data to be written to the inserted card from the CU control unit 323 to the card reader / writer. When transmitted, the card reader / writer writes the data to the inserted card.

  The CU control unit 323 manages and stores the player's possession balls when the player is playing. Data such as the remaining amount or the number of game balls is output from the CU control unit 323 to the display control unit 350, and is converted into display data by the display control unit 350. The display data converted by the display control unit 350 is transmitted to the P base 2. The display data transmitted to the P platform 2 is input to the display 312 via the relay board 14. The display 312 displays an image corresponding to the display data. Further, when the player operates a touch panel provided on the surface of the display 312, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323 via the display control unit 350. When the player operates the ball lending button 321, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323. The ball lending button 321 is not limited to the configuration provided in the CU 3, and may be configured so as to be provided in the P platform 2 and input an operation signal to the CU control unit 323. When the player operates the replay button 319, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323. When the player operates the return button 322, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323.

  In the pachinko machine 2, the main control board 16 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 2, the payout control board 17 that manages and stores the game balls, and the drive control of the launch motor 18 based on commands from the payout control board 17 A launch control board 31, a variable display device 278, and an effect control board 15 that controls the display of the variable display device 278 based on a command transmitted from the main control board 16.

  The main control board 16 and the effect control board 15 are provided on the game board 26. The main control board 16 is equipped with a game control microcomputer as the main control unit 161. A microcomputer for gaming machine control includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Member) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a CPU work area. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices. The main controller 161 is connected to a winning sensor 162 and a radio wave sensor 163 provided on the game board 26.

  When a ball wins each start winning opening 275, 276, 277, the main control unit 161 draws a random number for determining the big hit (or further including the small win) / off and stores the random number. This is called reserved storage. The maximum value of the number of reserved memories is, for example, 4. When the variable display device 278 is ready to start a new variable display, the main control unit 161 digests one reserved memory, makes a jackpot determination based on the reserved memory, and derives the display result from the variable start. The variable display time to reach is determined from multiple types. Further, when the big hit is determined, it is also determined whether or not the probability fluctuation is caused. The main control unit 161 transmits the result of the jackpot determination (including whether or not to change the probability) and information regarding the variable display time to the effect control unit 151 mounted on the effect control board 15 as commands.

  The variable display command transmitted from the main control unit 161 to the effect control unit 151 specifies a variable start command indicating the start of variable display, a display result command indicating the result of variable display (big hit / out), and a variable display pattern. A variable display time command that is possible, a variable stop command that indicates the timing for deriving and displaying a variable display result, and the like are included. Furthermore, the commands transmitted from the main control unit 161 to the production control unit 151 include a command that can identify the progress status of the big hit during the big hit, a command that indicates the occurrence of a new reserved memory, and the occurrence of an error in the gaming state. There are commands to show.

  The effect control unit 151 determines the variable display content of the variable display device 278 based on these commands transmitted from the main control unit 161. For example, the effect control unit 151 specifies a variable display result and a variable display time based on a command transmitted from the main control unit 161, determines a stop symbol, and a variable display pattern (reach presence / absence, reach type). In addition, the effect pattern of the notice effect related to the big hit or reach is determined. The effect control unit 151 controls display of the variable display device 278 according to the determined variable display content.

  The effect control board 15 is also connected to the display 54 via the relay board 14 on the gaming machine frame 6 side. The effect control unit 151 transmits a display control signal for variable display or the like to the variable display device 278 and transmits a display control signal for performing display in conjunction with the display of the variable display device 278 to the display unit 54. Is possible.

  The payout control board 17 is provided on the front frame 6 (game frame). The payout control board 17 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer which is a payout control unit 171. The payout control microcomputer includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Member) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

  Further, the above-described firing ball detection switch 903, out ball detection switch 701, foul ball detection switch 33, counting button 28, and radio wave sensor 173 are provided in a state in which the discharge control board 17 is electrically connected. The radio wave sensor 173 is for detecting an illegal act of illegally transmitting radio waves and mainly turning on the ball raising switch (upper) 41a. A detection signal of the radio wave sensor 173 is input to the payout control unit 171 via an input port (not shown) of the payout control board 17. As described above, the ball raising switch (upper) 41a detects the launch of a game ball by changing from on to off, and the payout control unit 171 subtracts “1” from the number of game balls based on the detection. To do. Accordingly, when the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is always turned on by an improper radio wave, the number of game balls is not subtracted no matter how many balls are fired. Such radio fraud is detected by the radio wave sensor 173. Note that not only the ball raising switch (upper) 41a but also the fired ball detection switch 903 (see FIG. 2) may be subject to fraud by radio waves. In other words, when only the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is always turned on by unauthorized radio waves, ball firing is not detected, while the actually fired ball is recovered and detected by the firing ball detection switch 903. In such a case, the number of fired balls and recovered balls (out balls) is wrinkled, an abnormality is detected, and the fraud detection information 2 of “number of fired / OUT mismatched balls” is transmitted from the P stand 2 to the CU 3. (It will be described later in FIG. 17). However, the fraud detection information 2 of the “number of fired / OUT inconsistent balls” is not transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU 3 by sending an improper radio wave to the firing ball detection switch 903 to make it undetectable. Occurs. In the present embodiment, since the radio wave sensor 173 also detects unauthorized radio waves transmitted to such a shot ball detection switch 903, the above-described inconvenience can be prevented.

  From main control board 16 to payout control board 17, main control chip ID, winning opening information, round information, connection confirmation signal, winning detection signal, starting winning opening winning information, error information, number of symbols determined, jackpot information, manufacturer specific Jackpot information is sent.

  The main control chip ID (also referred to as main chip ID) is a chip ID recorded on the main control board 16 of the pachinko machine 2, and is transmitted to the payout control board 17 when the pachinko machine 2 is turned on. Information. The winning opening information is information including the type of winning opening (start winning opening, normal winning opening, large winning opening) and the number of winning balls (the number of payout balls when a game ball enters the winning opening). It is transmitted to the dispensing control board 17 when the machine 2 is turned on. The round information is information on the number of rounds when a big hit is made, and is transmitted to the payout control board 17 when the pachinko machine 2 is powered on.

  The connection confirmation signal is a signal for confirming that the main control board 16 and the payout control board 17 are connected, and a signal of a predetermined voltage is constantly supplied from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17. The payout control board 17 is configured to control the operation on the condition that the payout control board 17 receives the predetermined voltage signal. The winning detection signal is a detection signal of a pachinko ball that has won a winning opening other than the starting winning opening. Upon receiving this detection signal, the payout control board 17 performs control to add the number of balls to be given to one winning ball to the number of game balls and the number of added balls. This will be described in detail later.

  The start winning award winning information is information indicating that a pachinko ball has won a winning winning opening 1 or a starting winning opening 2. The error information is information for notifying the payout control board 17 when an error occurs while the main control board 16 is performing game control.

  The symbol determination number of times is information on symbols determined as display results of the variable display device for winnings at each start winning opening.

  The jackpot information is information indicating that a jackpot has occurred. The breakdown includes common jackpot information indicating a jackpot common to each manufacturer and manufacturer-specific jackpot information indicating a manufacturer-specific jackpot. The common jackpot information is a jackpot commonly used by each gaming machine manufacturer, such as 15 round jackpots, and includes probability variation information when a probability change occurs with the jackpot. When the time-short state (control state for shortening the variable display time of the variable display device) occurs, the time-short information is included. The manufacturer-specific big hit is a big hit state that is adopted only by a certain gaming machine manufacturer, such as sudden probability change (surprise).

  A health check command and a winning ball number acceptance command are transmitted from the payout control board 17 to the main control board 16. The health check command is a command for checking whether or not the main control board 16 is operating normally. The prize ball number acceptance command is a command indicating that the additional number of balls has been accepted.

  An out ball detection signal is input from the out ball detection switch 701 to the payout control board 17. The payout control board 17 to which the out ball detection signal is input subtracts and updates the number of in-game balls (the number of floating balls floating in the game area 27) as will be described later. In the payout control board 17 to which the foul ball detection signal is input from the foul ball detection switch 33, as described later, the addition ball number and the game ball number are added and updated, and the in-game ball number is subtracted and updated. A shot detection signal is input from the shot detection switch 903 to the payout control board 17. The payout control board 17 to which the fired ball detection signal is input updates the number of in-game balls by subtraction.

  The security board 325 of the card unit 3 and the payout control board 17 of the pachinko machine 2 are electrically connected. As will be described later, a recovery request, a recovery detail request, and communication start from the security board 325 to the payout control board 17 Various commands such as a request, a communication end request, a status information request, a card insertion notification, a card return notification, and a communication test request are transmitted.

  The recovery request is a command that requests the pachinko machine 2 to notify the recovery information, as will be described later. The payout control board 17 receives the recovery request and notifies the card unit 3 of the recovery information of the pachinko machine 2. The recovery detail request is a command for requesting the pachinko machine 2 to notify the recovery detailed information. The payout control board 17 receives the recovery detail request and notifies the card unit 3 of the recovery detailed information of the pachinko machine 2. The communication start request is a command for requesting the pachinko machine 2 to start communication. The payout control board 17 responds to the card unit 3 with the communication start in response to the communication start request. The communication end request is a command for requesting the pachinko machine 2 to end communication. The payout control board 17 receives a communication end request and responds to the card unit 3 with a communication end.

  The status information request is a command that requests the pachinko machine 2 to notify the status information. The payout control board 17 receives the status information request and notifies the card unit 3 of the status information of the pachinko machine 2. The card insertion notification is a command for notifying the pachinko machine 2 that a card has been inserted. The payout control board 17 receives a card insertion notification and responds to the card unit 3 that a card has been inserted. The card return notification is a command for notifying the pachinko machine 2 that the card has been returned. The payout control board 17 receives a card return notification and responds to the card unit 3 that the card has been returned. The communication test request is a command for notifying the pachinko machine 2 of test data. The payout control board 17 responds with test data to the card unit 3 in response to the communication test request.

  Various responses such as a recovery response, a recovery detail response, a communication start response, a communication end response, a status information response, a card insertion response, a card return response, and a communication test response are transmitted from the payout control board 17 to the security board 325.

  In addition to the payout control board 17, the front frame 6 (game frame) is provided with a relay board 14, a launch control board 31, a launch motor 18, and a game ball number display 29. The game ball number indicator 29 may be directly attached to the front frame 6, but it may be attached to the front frame 6 like an upper plate or a lower plate provided on the front side of a normal pachinko machine from which balls are paid out. You may make it provide in the aspect which can be rotated. The same applies to the display 54.

  The payout control unit 171 of the payout control board 17 displays the number of game balls currently owned by the player on the game ball number display 29. The firing control board 31 emits a firing motor excitation output to drive the firing motor 18 when a touch ring input signal for detecting that the player is touching the hitting ball operating handle 25 is input.

  A firing control signal and a firing permission signal are output from the dispensing control board 17 to the firing control board 31. Upon receiving this, the launch control board 31 outputs a signal for exciting the launch motor 18. Thereby, the pachinko ball is in a state where it is bullet-launched into the game area 27.

  A display 54 is provided in the front frame 6 (game frame). The display 54 receives display data (display control signal) from the display control unit 350 of the card unit 3 via the relay board 14. Further, the display unit 54 receives display data (display control signal) from the effect control board 15 via the relay board 14.

  The relay board 14 outputs a display control signal from one of the effect control board 15 and the display control unit 350 to the display 54 and outputs the display control signal to the display 54 based on the display control signal from the effect control board 15 or the display control unit 350. A switching circuit 141 for displaying an image is mounted.

  In the present embodiment, the P-side display 54 is configured to be controlled on the CU side, but instead, display control for controlling the display 54 on the P-side. A substrate may be provided. In this case, the display control board controls display of the display 54 based on a command from the payout control unit 171.

<Display (touch panel) display control (when using a switching circuit)>
FIG. 6 is a block diagram for explaining display control of the game ball number display 29 and the display 54. FIG. 6 shows only the main components related to the display control of the game ball number display 29 and the display 54 among the various configurations of the CU 3 and the P stand 2 shown in FIG.

  The main control unit 161 mounted on the main control board 16 transmits various types of game information that change with game control to the payout control part 171 of the payout control board 17. The payout control unit 171 transmits ball number information and the like to the CU control unit 323 based on the game information transmitted from the main control unit 161, and controls display of the game ball number display 29. As a result, the number of game balls currently owned by the player is displayed on the game ball number display 29, and the display of the number of game balls is subtracted and updated based on the ball launch or counting operation, The display of the number of game balls is added and updated on the basis of a ball lending operation or the like.

  The CU control unit 323 updates the game information such as the number of game balls stored by itself based on the number of balls information transmitted from the payout control unit 171. Further, the CU control unit 323 stores the remaining amount of the card and the player's possession ball, and the display control unit displays information for display based on the stored game information on the display 54 on the P table 2 side. To 350. The display control unit 350 transmits a display control signal based on the information to the relay board 14 on the P table 2 side.

  On the other hand, a display control signal from the effect control unit 151 of the effect control board 15 is also input to the relay board 14. The effect control unit 151 transmits a display control signal for display control of the variable display device 278 based on various variable display commands received from the main control unit 161 to the variable display device 278 and controls the display 54. A display control signal for transmission is also transmitted to the relay board 14.

  Usually, a display control signal is transmitted to the relay board 14 only from the display control 350 side of the CU 3, and no display control signal is transmitted from the effect control unit 151. As a result, normally, the display unit 54 displays information such as points and card balance based on the display control signal from the display control 350 of the CU 3. However, when the effect control unit 151 detects a change in the gaming state of the gaming machine based on the command transmitted from the main control unit 161, it transmits a display control signal corresponding to the change in the gaming state to the relay board 14. .

  When the display control signal is input from the effect control unit 151, the switching circuit 141 receives the display control signal input from the effect control unit 151 instead of the display control signal input from the display control unit 350 to the display unit 54. Switch the circuit to transmit. As a result, the display 54 normally displays a score based on the display control on the CU 3 side. For example, when the game state changes due to a big hit display on the variable display device 278, the display The display of 54 is switched to one that interlocks with the display of the variable display device 278 such as a jackpot display. After that, when transmission of the display control signal from the effect control unit 151 to the relay board 14 is stopped, the switching circuit 141 repeats the signal input source. As a result, information based on the display control on the CU 3 side is displayed again on the display unit 54.

  That is, in the above example, the switching circuit 141 has a configuration in which, among the effect control unit 151 and the display control unit 350, the display control signal input from the effect control unit 151 is preferentially transmitted to the display unit 54. Since the display control signal is input to the switching circuit 141 only from the display control unit 350 in normal times, information based on the display control on the CU3 side is displayed on the display unit 54, and a switching condition such as occurrence of a big hit is established. When the display control signal is input from the effect control unit 151, the display control signal is prioritized and transmitted to the display 54, and the display on the display 54 is switched.

  However, instead of this, the switching circuit 141 adopts a configuration in which the display control signal input from the display control unit 350 is preferentially transmitted to the display unit 54 among the effect control unit 151 and the display control unit 350. Also good.

  That is, the switching circuit 141 performs an effect display that is linked to the display of the variable display device 278 on the display 54 based on a display control signal that is always received from the effect control unit 151 at a normal time, and there are few remaining game points and points. When a display control signal for displaying that fact is input from the CU 3 side when the predetermined switching condition is established, the signal input source is switched from the effect control unit 151 to the display control unit 359, whereby the display 54 However, the game effect screen may change to a screen for notifying that there are few game points or points remaining.

  In the present embodiment, the display control of the game ball number display 29 for displaying the number of game balls is not performed by the CU 3 but by the P stand 2 directly related to the fluctuation of the game ball number. When used and subtracted or added by game, the updated number of game balls can be immediately reflected on the game ball number display 29.

  If the display control of the game ball number display 29 is performed by the CU 3, from the CU 3 to the game ball number display 29 based on the information on the number of game balls transmitted from the P stand 2 to the CU 3. A display control signal is sent. However, in this case, the number of game balls actually changes depending on the communication status between the CU 3 and the P stand 2, but the change is displayed on the game ball number display 29. There is a risk of inconvenience that it will not be reflected immediately. According to the present embodiment, such inconvenience can be prevented.

  On the other hand, since the display 54 controls the display on the CU3 side, the display control of the P stand 2 is compared with the case where the P stand 2 that controls the display of the game ball number display 29 further controls the display 54. The burden can be reduced.

  In addition, when the display device 54 performs a display operation with a display control signal transmitted from the effect control unit 151 to the relay board 14, the relay board 14 simply relays the signal transmitted from the effect control unit 151 and displays it as it is. It suffices to have a function of transmitting to the device 54. On the other hand, there may be a case where the signal form of the display control signal for causing the display device 54 to perform display operation and the signal form of the display control signal transmitted from the effect control unit 151 are different. In addition to the switching circuit 141, the relay substrate 14 may be provided with a conversion circuit that converts the signal form.

  Further, when the switching condition is established, the display image displayed on the display unit 54 by the display control signal transmitted from the effect control unit 151 and the display control signal transmitted from the effect control unit 151 are displayed on the variable display device 278. The images may be the same or different. If they are different, it is necessary to store two types of image data, that is, image data for the variable display device 278 and image data for the display 54 in the effect control unit 151.

  The game ball number display 29 may be configured to be controlled by the main control unit 161, or the effect control unit 151 transmits a command related to the number of game balls from the main control unit 161 to the effect control unit 151. It is good also as a structure which controls display.

<Display (touch panel) display control (when switching control unit is used)>
FIG. 7 is a block diagram for explaining a modification of FIG. FIG. 6 discloses a configuration in which the switching circuit 141 is mounted on the relay board 14 and a display control signal input from one of the effect control unit 151 and the display control unit 350 is preferentially transmitted to the display unit 54. did.

  Here, an example in which the switching control unit 142 including a microcomputer is mounted on the relay circuit 14 will be described with reference to FIG. 7 is the same as that shown in FIG. 6 except that the switching circuit 141 is replaced with a switching control unit 142.

  The display control unit 350 of the CU 3 periodically transmits information such as the points to be displayed on the display and the card remaining amount to the switching control unit 142. Similarly, the effect control unit 151 periodically transmits information indicating a change in the gaming state (start and end of variable display on the variable display device, occurrence of reach, occurrence of jackpot, etc.) to the switching control unit 142. .

  The switching control unit 142 determines whether or not a switching condition for switching the display on the display unit 54 is satisfied based on information received from both the display control unit 350 and the effect control unit 151 (step S1421). The switching condition may be, for example, any one of “the number of game points is a predetermined point or less”, “the number of points is a predetermined point or less”, “the remaining amount of the card is a predetermined point or less”, “a big hit occurrence”, or “a reach occurrence”. Conceivable.

  Here, for example, it is assumed that the switching condition is “the number of game points is a predetermined point or less”. In addition, a game effect screen based on information received from the effect control unit 350 is normally displayed on the display unit 54. In this case, if it is determined in S1421 that this switching condition is satisfied, the display on the display 54 is received from the display screen of the game effect based on the information received from the effect control unit 350. A display control signal for switching to the game point decrease notification screen based on the information is transmitted to the display 54 (step S1422).

  Here, the example in which the switching control unit 142 determines whether or not the switching condition is successful has been described. However, a configuration in which the display control unit 350 of the CU 3 determines whether or not the switching condition is successful may be employed. That is, if the display control unit 350 determines that the switching condition is satisfied, the display control unit 350 transmits a command indicating the contents to be switched and displayed to the switching control unit 142. Based on the command, the switching control unit 142 causes the display unit 54 to switch and display the screen. Alternatively, the display control unit 350 may directly control the display 54 so that the display control unit 350 directly controls the display of the variable display device 278. That is, a display control microcomputer is provided in the display control unit 350, and a VDP, a video ROM, a VRAM, an LCD drive circuit, and the like necessary for display control of the display 54 are provided.

  Note that the switching conditions may be other than those shown in FIG. For example, when a lending operation for adding a game point (operation of a ball lending button (lending button) 321) is detected, the switching condition is established, and the display 54 on which the game effect screen has been displayed until then is displayed. On the other hand, a state where the game points are gradually added and updated may be displayed together with the reduction display of the remaining card amount. Alternatively, in place of or in addition to such a lending operation, the switching condition may be satisfied when a conversion operation from a point to a game point is performed. Further, instead of or in addition to these switching conditions, the switching condition may be established when a depositing operation is detected, and the state of the deposit may be displayed on the display unit 54.

  Further, the switching condition is not limited to one of those described above, but may be any two or more. In addition, the screen is not switched from the screen based on one of the production control unit 350 and the display control unit 350 to the screen based on the other, but the screen based on the other is interrupted and displayed on a part of the screen based on the other. You may make it do. A method for such display will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Display (touch panel) display control (switched by changes in gaming state)>
FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining pattern 1 and pattern 2 as a display control example of the display (touch panel). Here, normally, the remaining amount of the card is displayed on the display (touch panel) 54 based on the display control of the display control unit 350 of the CU 3, and the display 54 is displayed in accordance with a change in the gaming state such as a big hit. An example of switching to a display interlocked with the display of the variable display device 278 will be described.

  Both pattern 1 and pattern 2 normally display the card balance etc. on the display 54, and the variable display device 278 derives and displays the jackpot variable display result, so that the effect screen interlocked with the jackpot display Is displayed on the display unit 54.

  In particular, pattern 1 is an example in which the display 54 is completely switched from the display screen of the remaining card number etc. to the effect screen with the occurrence of the big hit. Referring to FIG. 8, in a normal state in which the display result of the big hit is not derived and displayed on variable display device 278 (variable display device 278 is in variable display, variable stop, etc.), “(1) Pattern 1” is displayed. As shown, the display unit 54 displays the remaining card amount, the number of games, and the number of points based on the display control of the CU3. On the other hand, when the big hit display result (777) is derived and displayed on the variable display device 278, the display screen of the display 54 is completely switched to the “big hit” effect screen, and the display is linked to the display of the variable display device 278. To do.

  Pattern 2 is an example of displaying a jackpot effect image in addition to the remaining number of cards and the like on the display 54 as the jackpot is generated. According to the pattern 2, the game effect can be enhanced by a game effect linked to the variable display device 278 while continuously providing information such as the remaining number of cards.

  Further, according to such an embodiment, since the game information stored in the CU 3 can be displayed on the display 54 of the P table 2, information that is highly convenient for the player can be provided on the P table 2. . Moreover, when the condition for displaying the effect information on the display device 54 is established, the display device 54 displays the effect information linked with the display of the variable display device 278, so that the display device 54 displays not only game information but also game effect information. It can also be used for display.

<Display (touch panel) display control (switched by changes in game points, etc.)>
FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining pattern 3 and pattern 4 as a display control example of the display (touch panel). Here, the display (touch panel) 54 normally displays in conjunction with the display of the variable display device 278 (based on the display control of the effect control unit 151), and the game points are displayed on the display 54 according to the decrease in the game points. An example of displaying an image for notifying that there is little remaining will be described.

  In particular, pattern 3 is an example in which the display 54 is completely switched from the game effect screen to a screen for notifying that there are few remaining game points when the number of game points becomes a predetermined number or less. Referring to FIG. 9, when the number of game points exceeds a predetermined number of points (for example, 30 points), as shown in “(3) Pattern 3”, the display 54 displays the variable display device 278. A production screen linked to the is displayed. In the case of FIG. 9, since reach is displayed on the variable display device 278, an effect screen linked to this is displayed on the display 54. When the variable display device 278 is variably stopped, an effect screen related to a gaming state (for example, during a big hit) based on the display control of the effect control 151 is displayed. On the other hand, when the remaining number of game points decreases and becomes less than a predetermined number (for example, 30 points or less), the display screen of the display 54 is completely switched to a screen for notifying that the remaining number of game points is small.

  Pattern 4 is an example in which when the remaining number of game points is reduced, an image informing that the remaining number of game points is small is displayed on the display 54 in addition to the game effect screen. According to the pattern 4, it is possible to notify the player that the remaining number of game points is small while maintaining the effect of the game effect.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment described above, since the display information of the P table 2 can display the effect information related to the variable display, it is possible to provide a game with a high effect in effect together with the variable display device 278. In addition, when a condition for displaying game information sent from the CU 3 side is established on the display unit 54, display control for displaying the game information on the display unit 54 is executed by the CU 3, so the condition is established. In this case, the display 54 can be used not only for game effects but also for display of game information by the CU 3, and the display control burden of the P table 2 accompanying display of game information can be reduced.

  In any case of Pattern 1 to Pattern 4, the switching timing of the screen can be set variously. For example, it may be switched back after a predetermined time has elapsed since switching. In the case of pattern 1 and pattern 2, it may be possible to switch back at the timing when the variable display device 278 switches to the big hit screen after the big hit mode is stopped in the variable display device 278. In the case of pattern 3 and pattern 4, it may be possible to switch back in response to an operation on a touch panel or the like by a player who has confirmed a decrease in game points.

  Specifically, when switching to the effect screen in response to the occurrence of the big hit (stop of the doublet), when the effect of the big hit generation is finished in the variable display device 278 and the game shifts to the big hit round control, or When the big hit round control is finished and the normal hit state is restored from the big hit state, it is conceivable to switch back to the normal state. When switching to the production screen in response to the occurrence of reach, it is possible to switch back when the reach ends and the big hit or miss is confirmed. When switching to the effect screen in response to the notice effect on the variable display device 278 for jackpot or reach, it is conceivable to switch back when the notice effect on the variable display device 278 is completed. Alternatively, when the screen is switched to the notification screen in response to the remaining number of game balls remaining, it may be switched back when the situation where the number of game balls is small is improved by a ball lending operation or the like.

  Further, the effect information (such as jackpot) in FIG. 8 or the game information (such as game points) in FIG. 9 may be displayed as a telop that flows from one direction of the screen to the other direction.

  Furthermore, in Pattern 1 and Pattern 2, the example of interlocking with the display of the variable display device has been described. However, the display may be interlocked with the gaming state such as whether or not the probability variation state, and the start memory number (the number of reserved memories) ) Or the like may be displayed. That is, the display device 54 may perform a game effect other than the effect linked to the display of the variable display device 278. For example, it is also conceivable that after the first notice screen such as reach or jackpot is displayed on the variable display device 278, the second notice screen related to the first notice screen is displayed on the display 54.

<Notification process for abnormalities in card units and pachinko machines>
FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining notification processing when an abnormality is detected as a result of mutual authentication.

  Referring to FIG. 10, when an abnormality occurs in CU control unit 323, security board 325, payout control unit 171, or main control board 16, a notification is given in the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. For the abnormality mentioned here, the CU control unit 323, the security board 325, the payout control unit 171, or the main control board 16 is replaced with another illegally manufactured one, or malfunction or failure occurs due to noise or the like. Or offline status due to disconnection or the like. The key management server 800 shown in FIG. 10 manages a key that stores the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit in association with each serial ID (also referred to as SID) of the electronic component in the card unit 3. It is a server. The key management server 800 is a server that can communicate with the main control board 16.

  First, when an abnormality occurs in the security substrate 325 of the card unit 3, the CU control unit 323 detects an abnormality as a result of the mutual authentication performed between the CU control unit 323 and the security substrate 325 described above. This mutual authentication includes device authentication using a session key in addition to serial ID authentication and device authentication described later.

  The serial ID is a serial ID (substrate serial ID) of the security board 325, and is stored in the ROM of the security chip 325b when the security chip 325b of the security board 325 is manufactured. Further, when the CU 3 is brought into the amusement hall and connected to the hall server 801, the board serial ID is downloaded from the key management server 800 of the key management center via the hall server 801 and stored in the CU control unit 323. The

  When the CU control unit 323 detects an abnormality in the security board 325, the CU control unit 323 notifies the hall server 801 to that effect and transmits an abnormality notification command to the display control unit 350 of the card unit 3. The CU control unit 323 controls the display 312 to display that an abnormality has occurred and causes the display control unit 350 to perform an abnormality notification by lighting or blinking an abnormality notification lamp (not shown). Further, the CU control unit 323 transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred from the external communication unit to the hall management computer.

  When an abnormality occurs in the CU control unit 323 of the card unit 3, the security board 325 detects the occurrence of the abnormality by the above-described mutual authentication, and notifies the payout control unit 171 of a signal (abnormality notification signal) indicating that fact. . In response, the payout control unit 171 notifies the main control board 16 that an abnormality has occurred. As described above, the main control board 16 performs control to operate the abnormality notification lamp and transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer.

  When the security board 325 detects an abnormality of the payout control unit 171, the CU control unit 323 is notified of this, and the CU control unit 323 notifies the hall server 801 accordingly.

  As described above, when the security board 325 detects an abnormality of the CU control unit 323, the security board 325 notifies the payout control unit 171 of the fact. When detecting an abnormality of the payout control unit 171, the security board 325 notifies the CU control unit 323 of the fact. The notification destination of abnormality occurrence by the security board 325 is different. The reason for this is that even if the control unit in which an abnormality has occurred is notified that an abnormality has occurred, no abnormality notification control is performed and no abnormality prevention measure is provided. In addition, the security board 325 has a communication control function but does not have an abnormality notification control function. Therefore, the abnormality notification cannot be controlled by itself, and for this reason, notification is made that an abnormality has occurred in the direction of the control unit opposite to the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. The payout control unit 171 that has received the notification of the occurrence of the abnormality from the security board 325 notifies the main control board 16 to that effect. Upon receiving the notification, the main control board 16 performs the same control for abnormality notification as described above.

  When an abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 171, the security board 325 detects that fact and notifies the CU control unit 323 that the abnormality has occurred. The CU control unit 323 performs the above-described abnormality notification control. The hall server 801 is notified that an abnormality has occurred. When an abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 171, it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the main control board 16, and upon receiving the notification, the above-described abnormality notification control is performed.

  As described above, the payout control board 17 detects and notifies the abnormality to the main control board 16 when an abnormality occurs in the security board 325, while notifies the abnormality to the main control board 16. It detects and notifies the security board 325 that an abnormality has occurred. As with the security board 325 described above, the payout control board 17 is also controlled for anomaly notification even when a notice is given to the control unit in which an abnormality has occurred when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred. Therefore, a notification is sent to the control unit or control board on the opposite side of the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. The security board 325 and the payout control board 17 are not connected to an abnormality notification means such as an abnormality notification lamp or an abnormality notification display, and have a function of performing abnormality notification control themselves even when an abnormality is detected. Absent. In the above description, the security board 325 and the payout control board 17 are not connected to an abnormality notification means such as an abnormality notification lamp or an abnormality notification display, and perform abnormality notification control themselves even when an abnormality is detected. Although described as having no function, the security board 325 and the payout control board 17 may be provided with an abnormality notification function to directly notify that an abnormality has occurred.

<Frame configuration used in communication>
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a configuration of a frame used for communication in the gaming machine. In FIG. 11, transmission data (business message) is always transmitted in units of one frame. That is, the business message is not divided and transmitted. In addition, when transmitting business messages continuously, an interval of 1 millisecond or more is provided.

  One frame of transmission data includes a data length, a serial number, a command, and a data portion. “Data length” indicates the data length of the transmission data (serial number to data portion (business message range)). “Serial number” indicates the sequence number of the business message. “Serial number” is transmitted by counting up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission with an initial value “1”. However, the “serial number” is not counted up at the time of retransmission. “Command” is a command code of a business message. The “data part” is business message data.

  The business message range is the encryption target range. The data length, serial number, and command data length are each 1 byte. The business message range and the encryption target range do not need to match, and for example, the data portion can be set as the encryption target range.

<Transmission / reception mode between card unit side and pachinko machine side>
Next, FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram showing main data among various data stored on the card unit 3 side and the pachinko machine 2 side, and its transmission / reception mode. With reference to FIG. 12, main ones of various data stored on the card unit 3 side (CU side) and the pachinko machine 2 side (P stand side) and transmission / reception modes thereof will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the fluctuation of the number of game balls is calculated on the P stand 2 side, and the current latest game ball number is stored and managed. The current number of game balls is also calculated and stored on the CU 3 side, but the number of game balls is based on information transmitted from the P stand 2 side. On the other hand, the CU3 side manages and stores the number of possessed balls (the number of cards possessed), the number of stored balls, and the remaining card amount (remaining amount).

  FIG. 12 shows RAM storage data provided in the CU control unit 323 on the CU3 side and RAM storage data mounted on the payout control board 17 on the P table 2 side. First, when the power supply is turned on for the first time when the P stand 2 (pachinko machine 2) and the CU 3 (card unit 3) are electrically connected for the first time after being installed in the game hall, the payout control board on the P stand 2 side. 17 has a main chip ID (main control chip ID) transmitted from the main control board 16, transmits the main chip ID to the CU3 side, and also issues a payout chip ID (payout) stored in the payout control board 17 itself. Control chip ID) is transmitted to the CU3 side.

  On the CU3 side, the transmitted main chip ID and payout chip ID are stored. Next, data of the connection time, that is, the time at which communication is started after the CU 3 side and the P base 2 side are connected is transmitted from the CU 3 side to the P base 2 side, and the transmitted connection time is transmitted on the P base 2 side. Remember.

  In this state, three pieces of information of the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time identified on the CU3 side are stored on the CU3 side and the P stand 2 side. When the power is turned on thereafter, the three pieces of information, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data are transmitted from the P stand 2 side to the CU 3 side.

  On the CU 3 side, the transmitted data is collated with the data already stored, and it is determined whether or not the same P base 2 is connected as in the previous time. As for the connection time data, every time the power is turned on, new connection time data in which communication between the CU 3 side and the P base 2 side is started is transmitted from the CU 3 side to the P base 2 side. Time data is stored on the P table 2 side.

  Each time a command and response is transmitted between the CU 3 side and the P base 2 side, the serial number is incremented by “1”, and the serial number is stored on the CU 3 side and the P base 2 side. This serial number is a communication number for confirming whether or not communication is properly performed by updating the number every time data is transmitted / received between the CU 3 and the P unit 2. The last serial number is a number updated at the end of the updated communication number.

  A specific mode of serial number backup in the CU 3 and the P stand 2 in this embodiment will be described. The CU 3 backs up and stores the serial number transmitted to the P base 2 by a command, and when it receives the serial number from the P base 2 next, it rewrites the serial number stored in the backup and stores it. Then, when the next command is transmitted, the serial number stored in the backup is updated by 1 and transmitted to the P unit 2, and the transmitted serial number is stored in the backup. In CU3, such processing is repeated.

  Similarly, the serial number received from the CU3 by the command is backed up and stored in the P unit 2, and when the response is transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU3 next time, the serial number stored in the backup is updated by 1 and transmitted. Store the sent serial number as a backup. When the next response is received, the serial number stored in the backup is rewritten and stored in the received serial number. Such processing is repeated in the P stand 2.

  For example, a command is transmitted from the CU 3 side to the P base 2 side, and the serial number n at that time is transmitted, and the transmitted serial number n is stored on the P base 2 side. Then, when a response is returned from the P platform 2 side to the CU 3 side, the stored serial number n is added together (n + 1) and transmitted. On the CU3 side, since the returned serial number n + 1 is incremented by 1 from the already stored serial number n, it is determined that data communication has been performed normally, and the next time the command is sent, the serial number is incremented by 1 and n + 2. A serial number is sent to the P stand 2 side.

  The latest game machine information (game machine information being counted) is transmitted from the P machine 2 side to the CU 3 side. This latest game table information is stored in the latest game table information storage area of the RAM of the payout control unit 171 (see FIG. 5) on the P table 2 side. Specifically, information on the added ball number counter, information on the subtracted ball number counter, and information on the counted ball number counter are included. The number of game balls is not included in the latest game table information, and is transmitted from the P table 2 side to the CU 3 side as the count value of the game ball number counter as will be described later.

  Information on these counters is collectively transmitted to the CU side as a response. The added ball number counter is a counter that counts the added ball number. The added ball is the sum of “the number of winning balls × the number of winning balls” and “the number of back balls”. The back ball is a foul ball. That is, the addition ball indicates the number that the addition ball counter should add to the game ball. The subtraction ball number counter is a counter that counts the number of subtraction balls. The subtraction ball is the “number of fired balls”. That is, the number of balls detected by the output change from on to off of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a. Note that the “number of balls to be subtracted” does not include the “number of balls to be counted”. The counting ball counter is a counter that counts the counting balls. The counting ball is “the number of balls converted from game balls to holding balls by the counting operation”.

  For example, when a pachinko ball that has been placed in the game area 27 wins and the winning information is transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17, an additional ball to which a gaming ball is added based on the winning information. The added ball number counter counts the number, and the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number) is transmitted from the P stand 2 side to the CU 3 side. Also, the subtraction ball counter counts the number of shot balls as the number of subtraction balls based on the output change from on to off of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a due to the pachinko ball being shot in the game area 27, The value of the subtraction ball number counter (subtraction ball number) is transmitted from the P stand 2 side to the CU3 side.

  Alternatively, the payout control unit 171 counts the number of gaming balls as the number of counting balls by pressing the counting button 28, and transmits the value of the counting ball number counter (counting number of balls) from the P stand 2 side to the CU3 side.

  On the P-unit 2 side, each time the values of the addition ball counter, the subtraction ball counter, and the counting ball counter are transmitted to the CU 3 side, the count values are stored in the previous gaming machine information storage area (the RAM of the payout control unit 171). Etc.) are stored (rewritten) as backup data, and the values of the added ball counter, subtracted ball counter, and counted ball counter as the latest game table information are cleared to 0 (excluding the game ball counter). In the present embodiment, “clear” has the same meaning as “initialization”.

  As a result, the game table information transmitted to the CU 3 side immediately before is added to the storage area of the previous game table information (game table information transmitted immediately before). Stored as data. When the latest game machine information is not transmitted from the P machine 2 side to the CU 3 side, the backup data includes not only the value of each counter at the time of the next transmission but also the value of each counter of the previous time that was not transmitted. It is intended to enable transmission.

  Further, the payout control board 17 updates the value of the game ball counter in response to the occurrence of a prize, the firing of a ball, the occurrence of a back ball, and the occurrence of a counting ball (conversion from a game ball to a holding ball), The updated value of the game ball counter is transmitted to the CU 3 side as the number of game balls.

  On the CU3 side, the number of game balls, the number of cards held (simply referred to as the number of balls), the number of balls stored, the remaining amount, the total number of added balls (total number of added balls), total subtraction are stored in the cumulative data storage area in the RAM. The number of balls (the total number of subtracted balls) and the number of balls at the time of card insertion are stored. The number of cards possessed is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the number of possessed balls paid out (the number of balls converted from the number of cards possessed to the number of game balls) from the number of balls possessed when the card is inserted, and adding the counted number of balls. That is, the card possession number is the number of possession possessed by the player at the present time.

  The total number of added balls is added based on the value (number of added balls) of the added ball counter transmitted from the P stand 2 side to update the number of balls. Further, the number of balls is updated by subtracting the total number of subtraction balls based on the value of the subtraction ball counter (the number of subtraction balls) transmitted from the P stand 2 side. Further, based on the value of the counting ball number counter transmitted from the P stand 2, the number of card holding balls is added and updated. In this way, the CU 3 can manage the latest information by updating the total added ball number, the total subtracted ball number, and the card holding ball number with the latest game table information transmitted from the P table 2 one by one. It becomes possible.

  As shown in the figure, the CU 3 has an area for storing game balls, and also receives a count value of a game ball number counter (also referred to as game ball number or game ball total number information) from the P stand 2 side. CU3 updates the area for storing game balls in the following procedure. That is, the CU 3 stores the value based on the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number), the value of the subtracted ball number counter (subtracted ball number), and the value of the counted ball number counter transmitted from the P side. The number of game balls being updated is updated, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the game ball counter transmitted from the P platform side at the same timing matches the updated number of game balls. If they match, the game is allowed to continue, but if they do not match, control to shift to an error state is performed.

  As a result, for example, an error notification is performed by the abnormality notification lamp or the indicator 312 or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or hall server 801 (in this case, for halls). Error notification may be performed by the management computer or hall server 801). As a result, a predetermined notification that prompts an artificial response by a staff member is performed.

  Instead of shifting to an error state and stopping the game, the number of game balls stored on the CU 3 side may be replaced with the count value of the game ball counter transmitted from the P unit 2 side. Good. Alternatively, it may be corrected to an average value of the number of game balls managed on the CU 3 side and the number of game balls stored on the P stand 2 side.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the number of game balls is also stored on the CU 3 side, but it is determined whether or not the number of game balls matches the number of game balls managed and stored on the P-unit 2 side. (CU3 side function). Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the number of game balls stored on the P stand 2 side does not match the number of game balls stored on the CU 3 side due to fraud or other circumstances, it can be checked. Here, the determination function is provided on the CU3 side. For example, the number of game balls stored on the CU3 side and the Pball 2 side are stored by the hall server 801 or the hall management computer connected to the CU3. The number of game balls being played may be received, and it may be determined whether or not the two match.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the CU 3 stores a storage area for storing the number of cards held and the number of stored balls, a storage area for storing the remaining card amount of the received (inserted) card, and the total number of added balls (the number of added balls). (Cumulative total), the total number of subtracted balls (total number of subtracted balls), and a storage area for storing balls when the card is inserted. The CU control unit 323 (see FIG. 5) stores a stored ball in response to an input requesting the use of the stored ball (for example, a press input of the replay button 319 provided in the CU 3 (when there is no holding ball)). Subtract a certain number of balls from the area.

  The CU control unit 323 (see FIG. 5) is an input requesting the use of the holding ball (for example, pressing input of the replay button 319 provided in the CU 3 when the holding ball is present (however, when the holding ball is present)) Accordingly, a predetermined number of balls are subtracted from the storage area for storing balls. Further, the CU control unit 323 (see FIG. 5) subtracts a predetermined value from a storage area for storing the card remaining amount in response to an input requesting use of the card remaining amount (for example, pressing input of the ball lending button 321).

  When a player performs an operation to deduct the value from the player's own gaming value (for example, the prepaid balance, the number of balls, or the number of balls) and use it for the game, the number of balls that are deducted is the number of balls The number of balls to be added to the counter is transmitted from the CU 3 side to the P stand 2 side. In response to this, the P stand 2 side adds and updates the game ball counter.

  On the other hand, in the gaming system according to the present embodiment, it is possible to accept a so-called wagon service order in which the gaming value owned by the player is withdrawn and exchanged for a drink or the like. However, access to wagon services with game balls is restricted, and wagon services can only be received with holding balls. This is an image in which, in a conventional encapsulated pachinko machine in which each counter is provided, it is prohibited to grab a ball before counting remaining on a plate by hand and use it for a wagon service.

  For this reason, in this embodiment, when the operation for performing the wagon service is executed, if the number of balls is less than the number corresponding to the desired menu of the wagon service, the player is prompted to perform the counting operation. Has been. When the player performs a counting operation at that time, the number of counting balls based on the operation is transmitted from the P stand 2 side to the CU 3 side. In response to this, the CU3 side subtracts the number of game balls and adds and updates the number of card possessions.

<Commands and responses sent and received between the CU and the P platform>
Next, an outline of commands and responses transmitted and received between the card unit (CU) 3 and the pachinko machine (P unit) 2 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 13 shows the transmission direction, whether the data to be transmitted is a command or a response, the name of transmission information, and its outline.

  First, a command named recovery request is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2. This recovery request command is for requesting recovery information from the P unit 2. A response named “recovery response” is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3. This response of the recovery response notifies the CU 3 of the recovery information.

  A command named “recovery detail request” is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2. This recovery detail request command is for requesting recovery detail information from the P unit 2. A response named “Recovery Detail Response” is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3. This response of the recovery detail response notifies the CU 3 of the recovery detail information.

  A communication start request command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2. This communication start request command requests the P base 2 to start communication. A response of a communication start response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU3. This response to the communication start response is a response to the CU 3 for communication start.

  A communication end request command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P platform 2. This communication end request command requests the P unit 2 to end communication. A response of a communication end response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU3. This communication end response is a response to the end of communication to the CU3.

  A status information request command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P platform 2. This status information request command is for requesting the status of the CU 3 to the P unit 2. The CU 3 uses this command to periodically check the status of the P base 2. The status information request command includes the number of balls to be added from the CU side to the P platform side shown in FIG.

  A response of a status information response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU3. This response of the status information response is to notify the information / status of the P platform 2 to the CU 3. The response of the information response includes the latest game table information and the number of game balls shown in FIG.

  A card insertion notification command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2. This card insertion notification command notifies the P unit 2 of card insertion. A response of the card insertion response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU3. The response of this card insertion response is a response to the card insertion to the CU3.

  A card return notification command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2. This card return notification command notifies the P unit 2 of a card return. A response of a card return response is transmitted from the P stand 2 to the CU 3. The response of this card return response is a response to the card return to CU3.

  A communication test request command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P platform 2. This communication test request command notifies the P unit 2 of test data. A response of the communication test response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU3. The response of this card return response is a response of test data to CU3.

  Next, based on FIGS. 14 to 39, the command / response status information request, status information response, card insertion notification, card insertion response, card return notification, card return response, recovery request, recovery response shown in FIG. Details of the recovery detail request, recovery detail response, transmission start request, communication start response, communication start response, communication end request, communication end response, communication test request, and communication test response will be described in detail.

  First, referring to FIG. 14, a status information request command is transmitted from CU 3 to P unit 2. The transmitted status information request command notifies the P unit 2 of the status of the CU 3. Note that the CU 3 periodically collects information and status of the P platform 2 using this command.

  The specific data of the status information request includes data of serial number, command, CU status, number of added balls, and CU error status, as shown in the lower part of FIG. The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The CU 3 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission with an initial value “1”, and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code for requesting status information, and is “0x06” in binary data expressed in hexadecimal.

  The CU state represents the state of CU3 to be notified to the P-unit 2; when Bit0 is “1”, the card insertion process is in progress; when Bit1 is “1”, the card unit preparation state; and Bit3 is “1”. Is a game ball addition request, and when Bit 4 is “1”, a counting ball count response is shown. Bit2, Bit5 to Bit7 are not used.

  Further, only when the CU state Bit 3 is “1”, the data of the added ball number is valid, and the data of the added ball number is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2. Further, the data on the number of added balls indicates a value added to the number of game balls.

  The CU error state represents an error code that is occurring in CU3. “0x00” indicates no error, and “0x01”-“0xFF” indicates that an error is occurring.

  FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating in detail each bit in the CU state. Bit 0 shown in FIG. 15 indicates that the data name is being inserted into the card, “1” indicates that the card is being inserted, and “0” indicates that the card has not been inserted. That is, Bit0 indicates a state where a card (general card / member card) is inserted in CU3. In addition, a general card is being inserted by depositing into a stock card (general 0 yen 0 coin card) stocked in advance by the CU.

  Bit 1 indicates that the data name is in the card unit ready state, and “1” indicates that the card unit is ready, and “0” indicates that the card unit is being prepared. That is, Bit1 notifies the card unit preparation state to the P base 2 according to the state of the CU3. The timing for notifying the card unit preparation OK includes, for example, completion of start-up and cancellation during absence. The timing for notifying that the card unit is being prepared includes, for example, when starting up, away from the seat, closing a store, and other operations incapable errors.

  Bit 3 indicates a game ball addition request when the data name is “1”, and indicates that there is no game ball addition request when “1” and “0”, respectively. That is, Bit3 requests addition of game balls (the number of added balls) at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and stored ball payout operations.

  In Bit 4, the data name is a counting ball counting response, “1” indicates counting acceptance OK or counting response completion, and “0” indicates counting acceptance NG. When the CU receives the count request ON state information response from the P units, that is, before starting counting (when the count button is pressed), the CU notifies the P units of OK / NG for accepting the count. Further, the CU notifies the P machines that the reception of the count has been completed with this Bit4.

  Next, referring to FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, a response of the status information response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3. The response of the status information response to be transmitted notifies the CU 3 of the information / status of the P unit 2.

  The specific data of the status information request includes serial number, command, ball count information, game machine status, fraud detection information, and other game information data as shown in the lower part of FIG. . The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The P base 2 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code for requesting status information, and is “0x16” as binary data in hexadecimal representation.

  The number of balls information is the number of balls in P table 2 (the number of game balls, the number of fired balls, the number of outro passing balls, the total number of balls at the time when the command for requesting the status information is transmitted from CU3 to P table 2 (current). The number of award balls and the number of counting balls) and firing strength are shown. The number of game balls is the current number of game balls (the number of game balls as a result of calculating addition / subtraction). The number of fired balls is the number of fired balls (summed if there are balls fired multiple times at the time of transmission). However, if there are back balls, subtract the number of back balls. The number of balls that have passed through the outlet is the number of balls that have passed through the outlet 145 (when there are a plurality of balls that have passed during transmission, they are added together). The total number of prize balls is the total number of prize balls in the prize ball information 1-n. The prize ball information 1-n is, for example, the number of prize balls (see FIGS. 23 and 33) for each prize opening type (see FIGS. 22 and 33) such as a start opening, a big winning opening, and a winning opening (ordinary winning opening). See). The number of balls to be counted is the number of game balls counted. However, if the card unit preparation state changes from preparation OK to preparation, the number of game balls held by the gaming machine is counted and set as the number of balls to be counted. When the card unit ready state is ready, the number of game balls is counted and set as the number of counting balls by operating the counting button 28. However, if the card unit preparation state changes from preparation OK to preparation when the player is to leave the seat by remote control operation, the game ball is automatically removed without waiting for the operation of the counting button 28. Count and set as the number of balls to be counted (see FIG. 51). The firing strength is strength for launching a game ball.

  FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining the meanings of various balls and the confirmation points in more detail. As for the number of game balls shown in FIG. 18, the number of game balls held by CU 3 is calculated using “number of award balls” and “number of shot balls” described later by CU 3. Thereafter, the CU 3 checks whether the calculated number of game balls of the CU 3 matches the number of game balls of the P unit 2.

  The total number of prize balls (addition) is the total number of prize balls in the prize ball information 1-n. The “addition request ball number” transmitted from CU3 is not included. In addition, the CU 3 adds the data of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls held. When the data of the total number of winning balls is received without holding the card, the CU 3 does not add the number of gaming balls.

  The number of shot balls (subtraction) is data to be subtracted from the number of game balls held by CU3. If the data is received without holding the card, CU3 does not subtract the number of game balls. CU3 does not perform subtraction when the number of game balls held by CU3 itself is 0.

  The number of counting balls (subtraction) is data that is subtracted from the number of game balls held by the CU 3 and added to the number of cards possessed. Note that the number of counting balls is not used for the data of the number of subtraction balls transmitted from the P stand 2 to the CU 3. Further, when the data is received without holding the card, the CU 3 does not subtract the number of game balls. CU3 does not perform subtraction when the number of game balls held by CU3 itself is 0.

  Returning to FIG. 16, the gaming machine state indicates the state of the P machine 2 at the time when the command for requesting the status information is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P machine 2, and the gaming machine state 1, the gaming machine state 2, It includes information on the gaming machine state 3 and the gaming machine error state.

  Bit 0 in gaming machine state 1 is permitting a game when it is “0”, and is prohibited when it is “1”. Bit 1 in the gaming machine state 1 is waiting when it is “0”, and is playing when it is “1”. Bit 2 in the gaming machine state 1 is “1”, indicating that there is no gaming ball. When Bit 3 in the gaming machine state 1 is “1”, the game is completed. Bit 4 in gaming machine state 1 is counting when it is “1”. Bit 5 in the gaming machine state 1 is a game ball addition result when “1”. Bits 6 to 7 in the gaming machine state 1 are reserved.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating each bit in the gaming machine state 1 in more detail. Bit0 shown in FIG. 19 indicates whether the name is game permit / game prohibition, and whether the game is permitted or prohibited. When “0”, the game is permitted, and when “1”, the game is prohibited. It is in. Bit1 indicates whether the name is waiting / playing and whether the fan (player) is playing (launching a ball) or not. Not in the state), when “1”, the game is in progress (the fan is firing a ball). However, there is a game ball, and the game is being played in a state where the launch handle (hitting ball operation handle 25) is touched (touch sensor is touched).

  Bit 2 has the name “no game ball” and indicates the presence or absence of a game ball (detection of no game ball). When “0”, there are a number of game balls, and when “1”, there is no game balls. Bit 3 indicates whether or not the whereabouts of all the fired balls are confirmed in a state where the name is game completion and the ball firing is stopped. That is, it shows whether all the floating balls in the game area 27 have been collected. When it is “0”, the game is incomplete (a state where all balls are unconfirmed), and when it is “1”, a game is complete (a state where all balls are confirmed). Note that the P stand 2 times out and completes the game when the completion of the game is not confirmed for 15 seconds or more after the ball launch is stopped. However, it does not include ball stoppages due to a fire stop switch (also called a single shot switch).

  Bit 4 has a name as a count request, and indicates whether or not a game ball is counted (whether or not a count button is pressed). When “0”, there is no request, and when “1”, there is a count acceptance request at the start of counting. Or there is a request to pay out counting balls. When the counting operation is detected, the P platform transmits a status information response of this counting request ON to the CU, and confirms whether the counting process is permitted. Bit 5 is a game ball addition result whose name is a game ball addition process result, and is “0” for addition and “NG” for addition NG.

  Returning to FIG. 16, Bit 0 in the gaming machine state 2 is a big hit 1 (all big hits) when it is “1”. There are various types of jackpots such as jackpots and jackpots with different numbers of balls. Bit0 is “1” during any type of jackpot. Bit 1 in the game stand state 2 is 2 for big hit (big hit + small hit) when “1”. This bit 1 becomes “1” regardless of whether all the big hits or small hits. Bit 2 in the game table state 2 is 3 for big hits (big hit for Idama Dai). For example, a big hit with a relatively large number of rounds at the time of the big hit is called a big hit of the Idama Dai. Bit 3 of the game table state 2 is a big hit 4 (a big hit of a small ball) when “1”. For example, a big hit with a relatively small number of rounds at the time of a big hit is called a big hit with an Idama small. Bit 4 of the game table state 2 is a big hit 5 (a big hit in the game) when “1”. For example, a big hit with a medium number of rounds is called a big hit. Bit 5 in the gaming machine state 2 has a big hit 6 (reserve big hit) when it is “1”. Bit 6 in the gaming machine state 2 has a big hit 7 (spare big hit) when it is “1”. Bit 7 in the gaming machine state 2 has a big hit 8 (reserve big hit) when “1”. These spare jackpots are provided according to the demands of the manufacturer of P cars or the amusement hall. In other words, each of the spare jackpot bits is defined according to the characteristic specifications (number of rounds, number of short hours, etc.) such as the hit mode peculiar to the model developed by each manufacturer of P units. Is to be able to decide freely later.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining each bit in the gaming machine state 2 in more detail. Bit 0 shown in FIG. 20 has a jackpot 1 (all jackpots), represents jackpot information, and sets “1” during all jackpots. Bit 1 has a big hit 2 (big hit + small hit), represents big hit information, and sets “1” during all big hits and small hits. Bit 2 has a big hit 3 (big hit for big ball), represents big hit information, and sets “1” during big hit with big big ball. Bit 3 has a big hit 4 (big hit for small ball), represents big hit information, and sets “1” during big hit with small ball. Bit 4 has a big hit 5 (big hit in the ball), represents the big hit information, and “1” is set during the big hit in the middle of the ball.

  Returning to FIG. 16, Bit 0 in the gaming machine state 3 is “big hit” and “short time” when “1”. This Bit0 becomes “1” during either big hit or short time. Bit 1 in the gaming machine state 3 is in the process of being changed when it is “1”. Bit 2 in the gaming machine state 3 is short in time when it is “1”. Bit 3 to Bit 7 in the gaming machine state 3 are reserved.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining each bit in the gaming machine state 3 in more detail. Bit0 shown in FIG. 21 has a name that is a big hit + short time, and represents game state information, and is set to “1” during a big hit and short time. Bit 1 is a name whose probability is being changed, represents game state information, and is set to “1” during the probability change. Bit2 has a name that is short and short, represents gaming state information, and is set to "1" in short and long.

  Returning to FIG. 16, the gaming machine error state is an error code that is occurring in the P machine 2, that is, “0x00”, no error, and “0x01” − “0xFF”, an error is occurring.

  The fraud detection information shown in FIG. 17 is information detected by the P stand 2 at the time when the command for requesting the state information is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2, and the fraud detection state 1, the fraud detection state 2, Information of fraud detection information 1 to fraud detection information 4 is included.

  The fraud detection state 1 is fraud detection information of the main control board 16. Bit 0 of fraud detection state 1 is a state of radio wave sensor detection when “1”. Bit 1 in the fraud detection state 1 is a magnetic sensor detection state when “1”. Bit 2 in the fraud detection state 1 is a state of fraud detection when it is “1”. Bits 3 to 7 in the fraud detection state 1 are reserved.

  The fraud detection state 2 is fraud detection information of the payout control board 17. Bit 0 of fraud detection state 2 is a state in which the glass plate is open when “1”. Bit 1 in fraud detection state 2 is a state in which the frame body is open when it is “1”. Bit 2 of fraud detection state 2 is a state of radio wave sensor detection when “1”. Bit 3 in fraud detection state 2 is a state of proximity sensor abnormality when “1”. Bit 4 in the fraud detection state 2 is a state in which a prize ball is detected when “1”. Here, the “goto” is an illegal act of acquiring a ball in an illegal manner in a pachinko or slot machine. Bit 5 of fraud detection state 2 is a state of composite goto detection when “1”. Bit 6 of fraud detection state 2 is a state of fraud addition detection when “1”. Bit 7 in the fraud detection state 1 is a door / frame opening detection (night) state when “1”.

  The fraud detection information 1 is data indicating information on the detection of the winning ball sensor goto (the number of unmatched winning balls). The fraud detection information 1 is valid when Bit 4 in the fraud detection state 2 is “1”. The fraud detection information 2 is data indicating information on the composite sensor goto detection (number of fired / OUT mismatched balls). That is, it is data indicating information when an inconsistency between the number of shot balls and the number of out balls (the number of balls passing through the outlet) is detected. The fraud detection information 2 is valid when Bit 5 of the fraud detection state 2 is “1”. The fraud detection information 3 is data indicating information of fraud addition detection (number of fraud addition balls). The fraud detection information 3 is valid when Bit 6 in the fraud detection state 2 is “1”. The fraud detection information 4 is data indicating information on the number of times the frame body is opened at night. The fraud detection information 4 is valid when Bit 7 in the fraud detection state 2 is “1”.

  The game information is information on the P device 2 at the time when the command for requesting the status information is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P device 2, and includes the number of game information, type information 1 to n, and prize ball information 1 to n. It is out.

  The number of game information is the number (n) of type information / prize ball information, and n = 0 to 22 (variable length). The type information 1 to n indicates the game type information 1 to n, and the prize ball information 1 to n indicates the game prize ball information 1 to n.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating the type information in the game information in more detail. In the type information shown in FIG. 22, the names from Bit 0 to Bit 3 are data types, indicating the data type of the game information. No information when “0”, no winning opening when “1” (ordinary winning opening) , “2” is the big prize opening, “3” is the start winning opening, and “4” is the number of symbol stops. The names from Bit 4 to Bit 7 are data numbers, which indicate data numbers for each data type of game information. When “0”, there is no information, and when “1” to “15”, the data number.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating the prize ball information in the game information in more detail. In the prize ball information shown in FIG. 23, the names from Bit 0 to Bit 3 are the number of prize balls, and indicate the number of prize balls at the time of winning for each data type of game information. When “1” to “15”, the number of prize balls is data. The names from Bit 4 to Bit 7 are the number of winnings, and indicate the number of winnings (cumulative) for each data type of game information. No information when “0”, data of winning numbers when “1” to “15” It is.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating the error contents in the gaming machine error state in more detail. The error code “0x10” shown in FIG. 24 is restored by pressing the error reset button after canceling the cause of the ball clogging or the like with the error content being a polisher motor error. The error code “0x11” is recovered by pressing the error reset button after canceling the cause such as ball clogging and the like because the error content is an elevator motor error. The error code “0x15” is restored by pressing the error reset button after canceling the cause of the ball clogging or the like with the error content of the ball passage 1 error. The error code “0x16” is restored by pressing the error reset button after canceling the cause of the ball clogging or the like with the error content of the ball passage 2 error. The error code “0x17” is restored by pressing the error reset button after canceling the cause of the ball clogging or the like with the error content of the ball passage 3 error.

  The error code “0x13” is automatically returned when the error content is too few game balls and the balls are replenished. The error code “0x12” is automatically returned by removing the ball from the ball tank because the content of the error is an excessive number of game balls. The error code “0x14” is automatically returned when the cassette is loaded with the error content not loaded. The error code “0x18” is automatically restored when the content of the error is a game ball overflow and shifts to CU3 by counting. The error code “0x19” is restored by pressing the error reset button after canceling the cause of the door switch abnormality and the like because the error content is the door switch abnormality.

  Next, referring to FIG. 25, a card insertion notification command is transmitted from CU 3 to P unit 2. The transmitted card insertion notification command notifies the card ID and insertion time of the inserted card to the P base 2 when the card is inserted.

  The specific data of the card insertion notification includes serial number, command, card ID, and card insertion time data as shown in the lower part of FIG. The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The CU 3 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission with an initial value “1”, and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code for card insertion notification and is “0x07” in binary data in hexadecimal notation.

  The card ID is ID information of the inserted card. The card insertion time is the time when a card is inserted into the card insertion / eject port 309 (see FIG. 1). The year information is two digits YY, the month information is two digits MM, the day information is two digits DD, and the time information is two. This is data represented by a digit hh, minute information by two digits mm, and second information by two digits ss.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, a response of a card insertion response is transmitted from P base 2 to CU3. The transmitted card insertion response response notifies the CU 3 that the card insertion notification has been normally received.

  The specific data of this card insertion response includes serial number and command data as shown in the lower part of FIG. The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The P base 2 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code of a card insertion response, and is “0x17” as binary data in hexadecimal representation.

  Next, referring to FIG. 27, a card return notification command is transmitted from CU 3 to P stand 2. The transmitted card return notification command is to notify the P unit 2 of the card return. Further, the CU 3 transmits the notification when the “card return” button is pressed.

  The specific data of the card return notification includes serial number and command data as shown in the lower part of FIG. The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The CU 3 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission with an initial value “1”, and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code for a card return notification and is “0x08” in binary data in hexadecimal notation.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, a response of a card return response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU3. The transmitted card return response is a response to the card return notification sent to the CU 3.

  The specific data of the card return response includes serial number, command, card ID, and card insertion time data as shown in the lower part of FIG. The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The P base 2 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code of a card return response, and is “0x18” in binary data in hexadecimal representation.

  The card ID is ID information of the card being inserted. The card insertion time is the time when a card is inserted into the card insertion / eject port 309 (see FIG. 1). The year information is two digits YY, the month information is two digits MM, the day information is two digits DD, and the time information is two. This is data represented by a digit hh, minute information by two digits mm, and second information by two digits ss. Note that CU3 does not return the card if the card ID included in the command does not match the ID of the card currently being inserted or if there is a problem with the card insertion time included in the command. , And processing such as prohibiting the writing of the holding ball to the card.

  Next, referring to FIG. 29, a recovery request command is transmitted from CU 3 to P unit 2. The transmitted recovery request command requests recovery information from the CU 3 to the P unit 2. The CU 3 transmits the same command first after the authentication is completed.

  The specific data of this recovery request includes a serial number and a command as shown in the lower part of FIG. The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The CU 3 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission with an initial value “1”, and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code for the recovery request, and is “0x03” as binary data in hexadecimal representation.

  Next, referring to FIG. 30, a response of the recovery response is transmitted from P base 2 to CU3. The response of the recovery response that is transmitted notifies the CU 3 of the recovery information held by the P unit 2. Upon receiving the command, the CU 3 determines whether or not the recovery process is necessary, and transmits a recovery detail request command to the P units only when the recovery process is necessary. As shown in FIG. 30, the recovery information returned from the P unit 2 to the CU 3 includes a serial number, a command, a previous last transmission serial number, a previously inserted card ID, and a previous card insertion time.

  The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The P base 2 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code of the recovery response and is “0x13” in binary data in hexadecimal representation.

  The previous last transmission serial number is data of a serial number included in the response of the status information response last transmitted to the CU 3 at the time of the previous connection. When “0”, there is no stored serial number. The previously inserted card ID is data of the card ID of the card that was being inserted at the time of the previous connection, and when “0”, there is no inserted card.

  The previous card insertion time is data of the insertion time of the card that was being inserted at the previous connection, and when it is “0”, there is no inserted card. This data is also represented by year information as 2 digits YY, month information as 2 digits MM, day information as 2 digits DD, time information as 2 digits hh, minute information as 2 digits mm, and second information as 2 digits ss. It is.

  Next, referring to FIG. 31, a recovery detail request command is transmitted from CU 3 to P unit 2. The transmitted recovery request command is for notifying the P unit 2 of detailed recovery information.

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 31, the specific data of the recovery request includes serial number, command, previous last transmission serial number, and additional ball number data. The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The CU 3 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission with an initial value “1”, and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code for a recovery request, and is “0x09” in binary data in hexadecimal.

  The previous last transmission serial number is data of the serial number of the command of the status information request last transmitted to the P unit 2 at the previous connection, and when “0”, there is no data. The previously inserted card ID is data of the card ID of the card that was being inserted at the time of the previous connection, and when “0”, there is no inserted card.

  The number of additional balls is data on the number of additional balls of game balls, and when it is “0”, there is no data on the number of additional balls.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram for explaining the recovery process of the P base 2 in detail. 32, the recovery process of the P unit 2 is added to the game ball with reference to the number of additional balls when the P unit 2 has not performed the process of the “last previous transmission serial number” notified from the CU 3 To do. Specifically, when the added ball number data is “0” and there is no added ball, the CU 3 does not transmit the added ball number data to the P unit 2, and the P unit 2 does not perform the recovery process. On the other hand, when the added ball number data is “1” to “65535” and there is an added ball, CU3 transmits the added ball number data by ball lending, holding ball payout, and accumulated ball payout to P stand 2, and P stand 2 performs a recovery process of adding the added number of balls to the current game ball.

  Next, referring to FIG. 33, the response of the recovery detail response is transmitted from P platform 2 to CU3. The response of the recovery response to be transmitted is to notify the CU 3 of the recovery detailed response held by the P unit 2. This “recovery detailed response” is a backup stored in order for the P unit 2 to transmit a recovery response to the CU 3 when the CU 3 transmits a recovery request command to the P unit 2 as the recovery process is executed. Data. As shown in FIG. 33, the recovery detailed response returned from the P unit 2 to the CU 3 includes a serial number, a command, previous game table information, previous game information, latest game table information, and latest game information.

  The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The P base 2 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code of the recovery response, and is “0x19” as binary data in hexadecimal representation.

  The previous game table information is the game table information notified to the CU 3 last time, and includes information on the number of game balls, the number of fired balls, the number of balls passed through the outlet, the total number of winning balls, and the number of counting balls. The “number of game balls” is the number of game balls notified to the CU 3 last time. “Number of fired balls” is the number of fired balls previously notified to CU3. The “out mouth passing ball count” is the number of out mouth passing balls notified to the CU 3 last time. The “total prize ball number” is the total prize ball number notified to the CU 3 last time. “Counting balls” is the number of counting balls notified to CU3 last time.

  The previous game information is game information notified to the CU 3 last time, and includes information on the number of game information, type information 1 to type information n, and prize ball information 1 to prize ball information n. The “number of game information” is the number (0 to n) of game information notified to the CU 3 last time. Note that n = 0 to 22 and the length is variable. “Type information 1” is the game type information 1 notified to the CU 3 last time. “Type information n” is the game type information n notified to the CU 3 last time. “Prize ball information 1” is game prize ball information 1 notified to the CU 3 last time. “Prize ball information n” is game prize ball information n notified to the CU 3 last time.

  The latest game table information is the latest game table information, and includes information on the number of game balls, the number of fired balls, the number of balls passed through the outlet, the total number of winning balls, and the number of balls counted. The latest game machine information is set to “0” when all information is not available. The “number of game balls” is the number of game balls currently held by the P stand 2. The “number of fired balls” is the number of fired balls currently held by the P stand 2. The “out mouth passing ball count” is the number of out mouth passing balls held by the current P stand 2. The “total prize ball number” is the total number of prize balls held in the current P stand 2. The “number of counting balls” is the number of counting balls currently held by the P stand 2.

  The latest game information is the game information currently held by the P platform 2 and includes information on the number of game information, type information 1 to type information n, and prize ball information 1 to prize ball information n. The “number of game information” is the number (0 to n) of game information currently held in the P table 2. Note that n = 0 to 22 and the length is variable. The “type information 1” is the game type information 1 held in the current P table 2. “Type information n” is the game type information n held by the current P unit 2. “Prize ball information 1” is game prize ball information 1 held in the current P stand 2. “Prize ball information n” is game prize ball information n held in the current P stand 2.

  Note that, as shown in Note 1) in FIG. 33, ALL “0” is set as the recovery information when there is no backup data or when the recovery information is indefinite. As shown in Note 2), if the CU3 has not performed the process of the “last previous transmission serial number” notified from the P table 2, the CU3 performs the recovery process using the previous game machine information and the latest game machine information. Do. When the “last previous transmission serial number” process is being performed, the CU 3 performs the recovery process using only the latest gaming machine information.

  In addition, when recovery processing cannot be performed due to a mismatch of communication partners (for example, replacement of the CU 3 or the P unit 2), it may be possible to manually correct by POS based on the display information of the P unit 2. For example, it is conceivable that the display information of the P base 2 is displayed using the liquid crystal display screen of the variable display device 278. Alternatively, it is also conceivable that a display device controlled by the payout control unit 171 is further provided on the P table 2 and information for manual correction is displayed on the display device. Note that POS refers to a free gift management system for exchanging free gifts and managing free gifts. In addition, POS is not limited to those for exchanging prizes or managing prizes, but records general sales information for each sale of merchandise at a store and uses the aggregated results as inventory management or marketing materials. It may be management (Point Of Sales system).

  Next, referring to FIG. 34, a command to start communication is transmitted from CU 3 to P unit 2. The transmitted communication start request command notifies the P base 2 of the start of communication. Further, the P base 2 clears the recovery information.

  The specific data of this communication start request includes serial number and command data as shown in the lower part of FIG. The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The CU 3 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission with an initial value “1”, and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code for a communication start request, and is “0x04” as binary data in hexadecimal representation.

  Next, referring to FIG. 35, a response to the communication start response is transmitted from P platform 2 to CU3. The response of the transmitted communication start response notifies the CU 3 that communication has started normally.

  The specific data of this communication start response includes serial number and command data as shown in the lower part of FIG. The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The P base 2 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code of a communication start response, and is “0x14” as binary data in hexadecimal representation.

  Next, referring to FIG. 36, a communication end request command is transmitted from CU 3 to P unit 2. The transmitted communication end request command notifies the P unit 2 of the communication end.

  The specific data of this communication end request includes serial number and command data as shown in the lower part of FIG. The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The CU 3 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission with an initial value “1”, and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code for a communication end request, and is “0x05” as binary data in hexadecimal representation.

  Next, referring to FIG. 37, a response of a communication end response is transmitted from P platform 2 to CU3. The response of the transmitted communication end response notifies the CU 3 that the communication has been normally completed. Further, after the notification, the CU 3 and the P stand 2 stop communication and wait for restart.

  The specific data of the communication end response includes serial number and command data as shown in the lower part of FIG. The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The P base 2 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code of a communication end response, and is “0x15” as binary data in hexadecimal representation.

  Next, referring to FIG. 38, a communication test request command is transmitted from CU 3 to P unit 2. The transmitted communication test request command notifies the P unit 2 of the test data. Note that the test data notified to the P platform 2 is not encrypted.

  The specific data of this communication test request includes serial number, command, and test data data as shown in the lower part of FIG. The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The CU 3 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission with an initial value “1”, and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code for a communication test request, and is “0x0F” as binary data in hexadecimal representation. The test data is data for testing notified to the P base 2 and is arbitrary data.

  Next, referring to FIG. 39, a response of the communication test response is transmitted from P base 2 to CU3. The response of the transmitted communication test response is to notify the test data to the CU3. Note that the test data notified to the CU 3 is not encrypted.

  The specific data of the communication test response includes serial number, command, and test data data as shown in the lower part of FIG. The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The P base 2 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code of a communication test response, and is “0x1F” as binary data in hexadecimal representation. The test data is arbitrary data that is test data notified to the CU 3.

<Main sequence in communication between CU and P platform>
Next, a process executed by the CPU in the CU control unit 323 and a process executed by the CPU mounted on the payout control board 17 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, with reference to FIG. 40, the mode of transmission and reception of commands and responses between the CU 3 and the P base 2 will be described. A command is transmitted from CU3 (primary station) to P station 2 (secondary station), and P station 2 returns a response to CU3 in response to the command. After receiving the response, CU3 transmits the next command to P unit 2, and P unit 2 returns the response to CU3 in response to the command. As shown in FIG. 40, the period from the transmission of the first command to the P unit 2 from the CU 3 to the transmission of the next command is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds. Further, the period from the transmission of the response from the P base 2 to the CU 3 until the transmission of the next response is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds.

  Thus, both a command and a response are transmitted between the CU 3 and the P base 2 at an interval of 200 ms. On the other hand, by operating the hitting operation handle 25, the P platform 2 hits 100 pachinko balls into the game area 27 per minute, so the hitting time interval is 0.6 seconds. As a result, a plurality of commands and responses are transmitted and received while firing one ball.

  Therefore, responses for notifying the amount of change in the number of game balls are sequentially transmitted from the P platform 2 to the CU 3 at intervals shorter than the ball firing time interval. As a result, the P stand 2 can finely notify the CU 3 of the amount of change in the number of game balls.

  Here, the transmission interval of the command and the response is set to 200 ms, but the transmission interval may be longer or shorter than this. For example, the transmission interval may be a firing time interval of the P platform 2. It is also possible to match with

  The transmission of the business message is a command / response system in which CU3 is the primary station and P station 2 is the secondary station. The command / response is transmitted and received at a constant cycle (200 ms).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, a process when communication disconnection is detected on the CU3 side will be described. If the response is not received within 200 ms after the CU 3 transmits a command to the P unit 2, the same command is transmitted to the P unit 2 again. Further, if a response cannot be received within 200 ms, a second retransmission is performed in which the same command is transmitted to the P unit 2. Resend the same command to P-unit 2 up to 14 times. If the response is not received from the P-unit 2 even after the 14th retransmission, the CU 3 determines that the communication is abnormal after 3 seconds and sets “communication interruption”. This communication abnormality may be caused when the connector of the CU 3 and the connector of the P base 2 are disconnected, or the connection wiring is disconnected or the power supply of the P base 2 is disconnected. CU3 does not increment the serial number when retransmitting the command.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, a process when communication disconnection is detected on the P platform 2 side will be described. A command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2, and the P unit 2 returns a response to the CU 3 in response to the command. After that, when the state in which the command from the CU 3 is not transmitted to the P stand 2 continues for 3 seconds, the P stand 2 determines that the communication is interrupted, stops the driving of the firing motor 18 and stops the game. The cause of this communication disconnection can be the disconnection of the connector of CU3 and the connector of P-base 2, disconnection of connection wiring, or power supply disconnection of CU3, as described in FIG.

  It should be noted that the command and response for detecting communication disconnection on the P platform 2 side do not include the communication end request / communication end response command and response.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the processing of the connection sequence when the power is turned on will be described. The process of the connection sequence in FIG. 43 is a process executed when communication is resumed after the communication between the CU 3 and the P stand 2 is normally completed. More specifically, it is executed when communication is resumed after the power of the CU 3 is turned off while the card is not inserted. A typical example is a case where the power supply is turned off after one day of business at the amusement hall is finished, and the power supply is turned on at the start of business the next day.

  First, power is turned on. When the power is turned on, communication is started after the firing motor 18 is stopped on the P stand 2 to stop the game. Thereafter, an authentication sequence is started, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU3. The CU 3 transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to transmit recovery information.

  In response to this, the P base 2 returns the recovery information backed up in the P base 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command (recovery response). ).

  This recovery information includes the last last transmission serial number, the last inserted card ID, and the previous card insertion time. 30 is exactly the various data shown in FIG. 30, and “recovery information” transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU 3 in the subsequent flowcharts is exactly the various data shown in FIG. .

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3 determines whether or not the previously inserted card ID and the previous card insertion time of the recovery information match the stored card ID and the card insertion time. The CU 3 transmits a recovery detail request to the P unit 2 when the card ID and the card insertion time match. That is, the CU 3 transmits the recovery data to the P unit 2. This recovery data includes the previous last transmission serial number and the number of additional balls. To be precise, it is the various data shown in FIG. 31, and “recovery data” transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2 in the subsequent flowcharts is exactly the various data shown in FIG. . At the stage where the card is not yet inserted into the CU 3 when the power is turned on, the card ID = 0 and the card insertion time = 0 on both the CU 3 side and the P base 2 side.

  In response to this, the P machine 2 executes recovery processing based on the received recovery data, and returns the recovery data backed up inside the P machine 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response. (Recovery detailed response).

  This recovery data includes previous game table information, previous game information, latest game table information, and latest game information. More precisely, it is the various data shown in FIG. 33, and “recovery data” transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU 3 in the subsequent flowcharts is exactly the various data shown in FIG. .

  The CU 3 that has received this detailed recovery response starts recovery processing from that point. This recovery process is a process for recovering the consistency of each other's data between the CU 3 and the P stand 2 and is executed not only when the power is turned on, but also when a trouble occurs and is recovered. Executed.

  The CU 3 counts up the serial number each time a command such as a recovery request is transmitted. However, it does not count up when retransmitting a command. When the P unit 2 receives a command having the same serial number as the previously received serial number, it determines that a communication failure has occurred and the CU 3 has retransmitted the command. The CU 3 backs up the serial number when the command is transmitted. Each time the P unit 2 transmits a response corresponding to the received command, it increments the serial number. However, it is not counted up when the response is retransmitted. When receiving a response with the same serial number as the previously received serial number, the CU 3 determines that a communication failure has occurred and the P base 2 has retransmitted the response. The P unit 2 backs up the serial number when the response is transmitted.

  After the authentication sequence is completed, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request command to the P unit 2 with the serial number “n”. The P base 2 counts up the serial number and returns a response of the recovery response to the CU 3 as “n + 1”. Further, the CU 3 transmits a recovery detail request command to the P unit 2 with the serial number “n + 2”. The P unit 2 counts up the serial number and returns a response of the recovery detail response to the CU 3 as “n + 3”.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 counts up the serial number to “n + 4”, and transmits a communication start request (recovery clear ON) command to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P unit 2 clears the recovery data. Then, the P platform 2 counts up the serial number to “n + 5” and returns a response to the communication start response to the CU 3. In response, CU3 clears the recovery data. Thereafter, a status information request command and a status information response response are transmitted and received between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  The CU 3 transmits a status information request command of serial number = n + 6 to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P table 2 backs up the number of game balls, the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of symbol stops, the number of winning prizes, and the data of the game table state. Further, the P stand 2 clears the values of the counters of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of symbol stops, and the number of winning prizes to zero. Then, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response of serial number = n + 7 to the CU3.

  The CU 3 that has received the response backs up the data on the number of game balls, the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of symbol stops, the number of winning prizes, and the status of the game table based on the status information response. Note that the breakdown of the number of added balls is “the number of winning balls × the number of winning balls” and “the number of back balls”. The breakdown of the number of subtraction balls is “number of fired balls”.

  Thereafter, the CU3 transmits a status information request command with a serial number = n + 8 to the P unit 2, and the P unit 2 returns a response with a status information response with a serial number = n + 9 to the CU3. Each time the P unit 2 transmits a response of the status information response, it backs up the data and clears the counter. Further, the CU 3 backs up the data every time it receives a response of the status information response.

  With reference to FIG. 44, the process of CU3 and P stand 2 when a card is inserted is demonstrated. First, before inserting a card, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and a card insertion state = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P unit 2 returns a response of the status information response including serial number = n + 1 and game prohibition to the CU3.

  Thereafter, when the card is inserted, the CU 3 outputs a command signal for taking the card to the card reader / writer, and the card reader / writer reads the information recorded on the taken card and receives the read information. For example, the card insertion process is executed.

  The CU 3 is in a card information inquiry state for a predetermined period after the card is inserted. This is in the middle of verifying whether the inserted card is appropriate, whether it is a membership card registered at the amusement hall, or inquiring the hall server 801 about the holding ball, storage ball, remaining card amount, etc. This means that the process of displaying the fact on the display 312 and the display on the display 54 on the P platform 2 side is being executed.

  Since the CU 3 does not authenticate the inserted card while displaying that the inserted card is being inquired on the display 312, the status information request including the serial number = n + 2 and the card insertion state = OFF is issued. A command is transmitted to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P unit 2 returns a response of the status information response including serial number = n + 3 and game prohibition to the CU3. The display 54 on the P platform 2 side is controlled by the display control unit 350 of the CU 3 to display that the card is being inquired.

  Thereafter, when the inserted card is authenticated, the CU 3 transmits a card insertion notification command including a serial number = n + 4, a card ID, and a card insertion time to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P table 2 backs up the received card ID and card insertion time data to the RAM of the payout control unit 171 and returns a response of the card insertion response including the serial number = n + 5 to the CU3. Also in CU3, the card ID of the inserted card is stored in the RAM or the like of the CU control unit 323.

  In response to this, the CU 3 sends a status information request command including a serial number = n + 6 and a card insertion state = ON to the P unit 2 to notify the P unit 2 of the card insertion status. The P table 2 receives the notification that the card is being inserted, permits the game, and returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 7 and the game permission to the CU 3.

  While the card is being inserted, CU3 sends a status information request command including serial number = n + 8 and card insertion status = ON to P-unit 2, and P-unit 2 sends a response of status information response including serial number = n + 9 and game permission. Reply to CU3.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, processing when depositing into the inserted card will be described. The inserted card is a general 0 yen 0 coin card (a general card with a balance of 0 yen and 0 coins) pre-stocked in the CU. In the present embodiment, a card is shown as an example of a recording medium stocked in advance in the CU, but IC coins may be used instead of the card.

  First, before the deposit operation, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and a card insertion state = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P machine 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1 and the game prohibition to the CU3.

  The player inserts a bill into the bill insertion slot 302 and performs a deposit operation. When a deposit operation is performed, the CU 3 writes the amount of money deposited by the card reader / writer on a card stocked in advance and the card reader / writer reads information recorded on the card on which the amount is written. Processing is executed.

  When the deposit operation is performed, the CU 3 transmits a card insertion notification command including a serial number = n + 2, a card ID, and a card insertion time to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P unit 2 backs up the received card ID and card insertion time data, and returns a response of the card insertion response including the serial number = n + 3 to the CU 3.

  In response to this, the CU 3 sends a status information request command including a serial number = n + 4 and a card insertion state = ON to the P base 2 to notify the P base 2 of the card insertion status. The P table 2 receives the notification that the card is being inserted, permits the game, and returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 5 and the game permission to the CU 3. As a result, the game is permitted. After that, by using the remaining amount of the card to secure a game ball, it is possible to play a bullet game.

  While the card is being inserted, CU3 sends a status information request command including serial number = n + 6 and card insertion state = ON to P-unit 2, and P-unit 2 returns a response of status information response including serial number = n + 7 and game permission. Reply to CU3.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a process for lending a game ball from the prepaid balance of the inserted card will be described. That is, a process when the prepaid balance recorded on the inserted card is consumed will be described. In the processing of FIG. 46, the current number of game balls is “50” balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and a game ball addition request = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1 and the number of game balls = 50 to the CU3.

  Thereafter, when the player performs a lending operation (ball lending operation) in which the “lending” button is pressed once, CU3 lends 500 yen, that is, 125 balls. When the ball lending button (lending button) 321 is pressed, the CU 3 confirms prepaid consumption for 500 yen, and the number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of added balls) = 175. Back up your data. In this way, the remaining amount consumption is determined by the CU 3 alone at the stage where the lending operation is performed. Thereafter, CU3 is in the display of addition. During the addition display, the display unit 54 displays that 125 balls are withdrawn from the remaining amount and added to the game balls.

  Next, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including the serial number = n + 2, the game ball addition request = ON, and the number of addition balls = 125 to the P unit 2. In response, P 2 updates the number of game balls to the number of game balls = 50 (current number of game balls) +125 (number of additional balls) = 175, serial number = n + 3, number of additional balls = 175, game balls. A response of the status information response including the addition result = OK is returned to CU3.

  Thereafter, CU3 sends a status information request command including serial number = n + 4 and game ball addition request = OFF to P unit 2, and P unit 2 returns a status information response including serial number = n + 5 and the number of additional balls = 175. A response is returned to CU3.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, a process when the number of game balls decreases on the P-unit 2 side when an addition request occurs will be described. That is, when there is a game ball addition request from the CU 3, processing when the number of game balls is reduced by firing balls on the P stand 3 side will be described.

  As already described, when a ball lending operation or a replay operation is detected, a request for adding game balls is transmitted from the CU to the P units, and the P unit side adds and updates the number of game balls in response to the request. At the same time, the game ball addition result is OK, and the number of game balls after the addition update is returned to the CU.

  However, as shown in FIG. 47, when a ball is fired on the P platform side (three shots in the example) before a ball lending operation or the like is detected and a game ball addition request is generated, The number of game balls after being updated with the addition request amount and the decrease in the number of game balls due to the ball launch is returned to the CU. That is, in FIG. 47, in response to the status information request for requesting the number of additional balls = 125, the number of game balls = 172 updated with the number of additional requests = 125 and the number of fired consumption = 3 Reply from the stand to the CU. For this reason, compared with the case where the state information response for notifying the increase in the number of game balls due to the addition request and the state information response for notifying the decrease in the number of game balls due to the ball launch are separately returned to the CU. Thus, the communication efficiency between the CU-P units can be increased.

  Hereinafter, the sequence will be described in detail with reference to FIG. First, in the process of FIG. 47, the initial number of game balls is “50” balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and a game ball addition request = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1 and the number of game balls = 50 to the CU3.

  Thereafter, when the player performs a lending operation (ball lending operation) for pressing the ball lending button (lending button) 321 once, the CU 3 confirms prepaid consumption for 500 yen at that stage and also determines the number of game balls. Data of = 50 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of added balls) = 175 is backed up.

  Alternatively, even when the player performs an operation of pressing the replay button once (or the ball payout button if a dedicated ball withdrawal button is provided), at that stage, the CU 3 Alternatively, the consumption of holding balls is confirmed, and the data of the number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of added balls) = 175 is backed up.

  As described above, the remaining amount, the savings, or the consumption of the ball is determined by the CU 3 alone when the operation is performed. Thereafter, CU3 is in the display of addition. In other words, the CU 3 displays on the display 54 that 125 balls are being deducted from the remaining amount and being added to the game balls.

  Further, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including the serial number = n + 2, the game ball addition request = ON, and the number of addition balls = 125 to the P unit 2. The P platform 2 fires three balls from when the response of the status information response with the serial number = n + 1 is returned to the CU 3 until the command with the status information request with the serial number = n + 2 is received. In response to this, P 2 updates the number of game balls to the number of game balls = 50 (current number of game balls) +125 (number of added balls) −3 (number of shot balls) = 172, and serial number = n + 3. A response of the state information response including the number of balls = 172, the number of subtraction balls = 3, and the game ball addition result = OK is returned to the CU3.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including the serial number = n + 4 to the P unit 2 and backs up the data of the number = n + 4 and the number of game balls = 172 (175-3).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, a description will be given of a process of paying out and holding out and replaying. In FIG. 48, the initial number of game balls is “50”. The replay process in FIG. 43 is similar to the process when the remaining amount shown in FIG. 42 is consumed. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and a game ball addition request = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1 and the number of game balls = 50 to the CU3.

  Thereafter, when the player presses the replay button 319 in a state where there is a ball or a storage ball, the CU 3 confirms the consumption of 125 balls from the ball or the storage ball, updates the number of game balls, Data of number = 50 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of added balls) = 175 is backed up. In this way, the consumption of the holding balls or the stored balls is determined by the CU 3 alone when the operation of pressing the replay button 319 is performed. In addition, when both the holding ball and the storage ball exist, consumption of the holding ball is given priority.

  In place of the control to prioritize the holding ball, a storage ball replay button and a holding ball replay button are provided, and the player can select and operate either the storage ball consumption or the holding ball consumption by operating the selection. You may do it. In other words, the replay button is used to obtain a game ball (game point) from a stored ball (stored medal) and a game ball (game point) from a stored ball (stored medal) replay button. You may comprise two with a holding ball (pointing) replay button. In addition, a holding ball payout button may be provided in CU3, and the holding ball payout button may be pressed to convert from a holding ball (a point) to a game ball (a game point).

  Thereafter, the CU 3 displays the addition of the game balls, and transmits a status information request command including the serial number = n + 2, the game ball addition request = ON, and the number of added balls = 125 to the P unit 2. In response, P 2 updates the number of game balls to the number of game balls = 50 (current number of game balls) +125 (number of additional balls) = 175, serial number = n + 3, number of additional balls = 175, game balls. A response of the status information response including the addition result = OK is returned to CU3.

  Note that CU3 indicates that the game ball is being added by displaying on the display 54 that 125 balls are being dropped from the holding ball or the stored ball and being added to the game ball.

  Thereafter, CU3 sends a status information request command including serial number = n + 4 and game ball addition request = OFF to P unit 2, and P unit 2 returns a status information response including serial number = n + 5 and the number of additional balls = 175. A response is returned to CU3.

  Next, a process of counting and subtracting a part of the game balls will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 49, the number of balls specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or visitor card) is “0” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “800” balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and a count response = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 800, the number of counting balls = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU3.

  Thereafter, the player presses the count button 28 once to perform an operation of converting the game ball into a holding ball. This single press is a short press of less than 1 second, and is different from a long press of 1 second or more described with reference to FIG. When the counting button 28 is pressed, the payout control unit 171 of the P platform 2 measures the pressing time, and determines whether the pressing is short for less than 1 second or long pressing for 1 second or more. 49 indicates that the payout control unit 171 determines that the short press is less than 1 second. In this case, 100 of the game balls are counted and counted. Counted as a ball. When the initial number of game balls is “800”, the number of game balls is “700” and the count ball is “100” by pressing the count button 28 once.

  In the operation of pressing the count button 28 once, the number of balls to be counted as the counting ball may be changed by the time during which the count button 28 is pressed shortly. For example, when the count button 28 is pressed for a short time of less than 0.5 seconds, the number of balls counted as the counting ball is 100 balls. When the count button 28 is pressed for a short time of 0.5 seconds or longer, the number of balls counted as counting balls is 400 balls. Further, when the time during which the count button 28 is pressed is a short press for 0.5 seconds or more, all of the remaining number of game balls may be counted as a count ball.

  In FIG. 49, immediately after the operation of pressing the count button 28 once is performed, the CU 3 transmits a command for status information request including a serial number = n + 2 and a count response = OFF to the P unit 2.

  When the operation of the count button 28 is detected, the P platform 2 notifies the CU of a count request associated with the operation of the count button 28 before starting the subtraction process of the game balls for the count based on the detection. That is, a status information response of serial number = n + 3 with the counting request turned ON is transmitted to the CU. As shown in the figure, at this stage, the number of game balls remains 800, and the number of game balls included in the state information response of serial number = n + 3 does not change.

  Upon receiving the status information response with counting request = ON, the CU determines whether counting is possible, and if it can count, transmits a status information request with the counting response turned ON (here, serial number = n + 4) to the P units. To do.

  Then, the P units determine that counting is permitted, subtract the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the operation of the count button (here, 100 points), and update the display of the game ball number display 29 from 800 to 700 At the same time, the result is notified to the CU by a status information response. That is, as shown in the figure, a status information response (serial number = n + 5) including the number of gaming balls = 700, the number of counting balls = 100, and the counting request = ON is returned to the CU3. Upon receiving this status information response, CU3 adds the counted number (100 balls) to the number of balls (0 ball) and updates the number of balls = 100, and the number of game balls = 800 (number of game balls before update). ) −100 (number of balls) = 700 data is backed up.

  Thus, in this embodiment, when a counting operation is detected, the counting process is not immediately executed, but a counting request is transmitted from the P unit to the CU, and a response to the response is sent from the CU to the P unit. Counting processing is executed after replying. For this reason, it is possible to perform counting processing after confirming whether processing on the CU side is possible or not, compared with control that immediately executes counting processing when a counting operation is detected. While the counting process is completed on the side, the counting process cannot be executed on the CU side, and it is possible to prevent the two from becoming inconsistent.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 receives a state information response and starts displaying to count 100 game balls. That is, the CU control unit 323 transmits a count display command to the display control unit 350. The display controller 350 receives the command and controls the display 54 on the P platform 2 side. As a result, the display 54 displays an image in which the number of game balls is counted and the number of balls is decreased, while the number of balls is increased. In this case, it is conceivable to perform an effect display such that game balls are guided and counted by each counter one by one. Another example of the effect display may be a display in which the number of game balls is converted to the number of balls in time. For example, the data for the number of balls and the data for the number of balls are shown in a bar graph, and the number of balls in the game ball number is increased while the number of balls in the game ball is increased while the number of balls in the game ball is decreased. The display to move to the bar graph may be repeated. In addition, as another example of the effect display, the current game ball number data and the number of possession balls data are digitally displayed as they are, and the number of possession balls is increased while decreasing the number of game balls, or a part of the number of game balls It is possible to repeat the display of moving the number of balls to the number of balls and various effects display.

  Further, the player performs an operation of pressing the counting button 28 once to convert the game ball into a holding ball. Then, the counting request and counting response are exchanged between the P units and the CU in the same sequence as described above, and a process of counting 100 points from the number of game balls is executed. In the drawing, a part of the sequence exchanged between the CU-P units and the serial number are omitted when the counting button is pressed for the second time.

  Here, a case has been described in which 100 balls out of the number of game balls are counted and counted as counting balls by pressing the counting button 28 once, but by pressing the counting button 28 once. The counting balls to be counted are not limited to 100 balls. For example, a configuration in which 200 balls or 300 balls out of the number of game balls is counted and counted as a counting ball by pressing the counting button 28 once short may be used.

  In this embodiment, when the information state response for notifying the number of counting balls is transmitted from the P units to the CU, the P balls side subtracts the gaming balls for the counting balls quickly. The number P may be subtracted from the game balls at the stage of receiving an information status response notifying the number and receiving a receipt confirmation from the CU.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, when notifying the counting ball to the CU, the “counting ball number” and “the number of game balls after subtracting the counting ball” are transmitted in the information state response. Instead, the “count ball” and the “game ball before subtracting the count ball” are transmitted to the CU by the information status response, and the CU determines “the number of game balls before subtracting the count ball” based on the information. The number of game balls after counting may be specified by subtracting “count ball number” from “.

  Next, a process of counting and subtracting all the game balls will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 50, the number of balls specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is “0” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “200” balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and a count response = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 200, the number of counting balls = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU3.

  Thereafter, the player performs an operation of converting the game ball into a holding ball by long-pressing the counting button 28 (an operation of continuously pressing the button for one second or more). “Pressing the“ count ”button length” in FIG. 50 indicates a case where the payout control unit 171 determines that the button has been pressed for one second or longer, and in this case, during one command / response period (200 ms). Of the number of game balls, 100 balls are counted and counted as counting balls. When the initial number of game balls is “200”, the number of game balls is “100” and the counting ball is “100” in one command / response period.

  In FIG. 50, immediately after the operation of long-pressing the count button 28 is performed, a status information request command including a serial number = n + 2 and a count response = OFF is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P platform 2.

  In response to the operation of the counting button 28, the P platform 2 notifies the CU of a counting request associated with the operation of the counting button 28 before starting the subtraction processing of the game balls for the counting. That is, a status information response of serial number = n + 3 with the counting request turned ON is transmitted to the CU. As shown in the figure, at this stage, the number of game balls remains 200, and the number of game balls included in the state information response of serial number = n + 3 has not changed.

  When the CU receives a count information = ON state information response, the CU determines whether counting is possible. If the count is ready, the CU transmits a status information request (here, serial number = n + 4) with the count response turned ON to the P units. .

  Then, the P units determine that counting is permitted, subtract the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the operation of the count button (here, 100 points), and update the display of the game ball number display 29 to 100. The result is notified to the CU by a status information response. That is, as shown in the figure, in order to notify the CU 3 of the state of the number of gaming balls = 100 and the number of counting balls = 100, the serial number = n + 3, the number of gaming balls = 100, the number of counting balls = 100, and the counting request = ON are included. A response of the status information response is returned to CU3. In response to the response of the state information response, CU3 adds the counted number of balls (100 balls) to the number of balls (0 ball) and updates it to the number of balls = 100, and the number of game balls = 200 (game balls before update) Number) −100 (the number of counting balls) = 100 data is backed up.

  Further, the CU 3 receives a response of the state information response and starts display for counting 100 game balls.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 6 and a count response = ON to the P unit 2. Count response = ON indicates receipt of a count ball in response to the previous response to the status information response.

  The P stand 2 determines that the operation is a long press when the operation of the counting button continues for a certain time. In this case, the P stand 2 further continues the operation for counting the game balls by a predetermined unit number (here, 100 points). That is, in order to notify the CU 3 that the number of game balls = 0 and the number of count balls = 100 in the subsequent count, the serial number = n + 7, the number of game balls = 0, the number of count balls = 100, and the count request = ON are included. A response of the status information response is returned to CU3. Upon receiving the response to the status information response, CU3 adds the counted number of balls (100 balls) to the number of balls (100 balls) and updates the number of balls to 200, and the number of game balls = 100 (game balls before update) Number) −100 (number of balls) = 0.

  In response to the response of the state information response, the CU 3 performs display for counting 100 game balls in succession to the display for counting the previous 100 game balls.

  Further, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 8 and a count response = ON to the P unit 2. The reason why the counting response = ON is to notify the P-unit 2 of receipt of the counting ball in response to the response of the previous status information response.

  In response to this, in order to notify the CU 3 that the number of gaming balls = 0 and the number of counting balls = 0, the P stand 2 has a serial number = n + 9, the number of gaming balls = 0, the number of counting balls = 0, and a counting request = A status information response including ON is returned to CU3. Upon receiving the response of the status information response, CU3 adds the counted number of balls (0 ball) to the number of balls (200 balls) and updates the number of balls to 200, and the number of game balls = 0 (game balls before update) Number) -0 (counted ball count) = 0 data is backed up.

  As the count display progresses, the number of game balls on the display on the display 54 eventually becomes zero. The player confirms that the number of game balls has become 0 and releases the counting button 28. By releasing the count button 28, the operation of converting the game ball into a holding ball is completed.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 10 and a count response = OFF to the P platform 2. The reason why the counting response is OFF is that the number of counting balls received in the previous response to the status information response is 0, and it is not necessary to notify the P stand 2 of receipt of the counting balls. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 11, the number of game balls = 0, the number of counting balls = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU3.

  Here, a case has been described in which 100 balls out of the number of game balls are counted and counted as counting balls during one command / response period (200 ms) by long pressing the count button 28. The counting balls counted during the command / response period (200 ms) are not limited to 100 balls. For example, when the count button 28 is long pressed, the number of counting balls counted in one command / response period (200 ms) may be 200 balls, 300 balls, and the like.

  In addition, regardless of the current number of game balls, a configuration in which all of the game balls are counted by performing an operation of long-pressing the counting button 28 for about 5 seconds (25 command / response periods) may be employed. Note that the number of game balls to be counted may be changed depending on the operation time for which the count button 28 is long pressed. That is, when the current number of game balls is large, the number of balls counted in one command / response period (200 ms) is increased, and when the current number of game balls is small, the period of one command / response ( The number of counting balls counted in 200 ms) is reduced. Specifically, when the current number of gaming balls is 10,000 balls, the counting balls counted in one command / response period (200 ms) are set to 400 balls, and when the current number of gaming balls is 1000 balls, once The number of counting balls counted during the command / response period (200 ms) is 40 balls.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the game ball automatic counting process will be described. In FIG. 51, a process of automatically counting game balls when the player leaves the seat and writing them as cards in the card will be described. The number of possessed balls specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is “0” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “500” balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a CU preparation state = ON, and a count response = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 500, the number of counting balls = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU3.

  Thereafter, the player calls a clerk to interrupt the game and leave for the purpose, and the clerk operates the remote controller or the like to receive it with the IR photosensitive unit 320 of the CU 3 to set “separate”. . Alternatively, an IR photosensitive unit may be provided on the P table 2 so that the leaving operation processing is performed by the IR photosensitive unit of the P table 2 receiving a leaving operation signal from the remote controller. Further, in place of or in addition to the remote control operation, a leaving operation button may be provided on at least one of the CU 3 and the P base 2 and the leaving processing may be controlled by operating the leaving operation button.

  Immediately after “seating” is set, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 2, a CU preparation state = OFF, and a count response = OFF to the P unit 2.

  The P stand 2 that has received the CU preparation state = OFF notifies the CU of a count request before starting the game ball counting process. That is, a status information response of serial number = n + 3 with the counting request turned ON is transmitted to the CU. As shown in the figure, at this stage, the number of game balls remains at 500 and does not change.

  When the CU receives a count information = ON state information response, the CU determines whether counting is possible. If the count is ready, the CU transmits a status information request (here, serial number = n + 4) with the count response turned ON to the P units. .

  Then, the P platform determines that counting is permitted, sets the number of game balls to 0 as the number of game balls, updates the display of the game ball number display 29 to 0, and returns a status information response. The result is notified to the CU. That is, as shown in the figure, a status information response (serial number = n + 5) including the number of game balls = 0, the number of counting balls = 500, and the counting request = ON is returned to the CU3. In addition, the display on the display unit 54 remains the number of game balls = 500 balls. Upon receiving the response of the status information response, CU3 adds the number of balls (500 balls) to the number of balls (0 ball) and updates the number of balls to 500, and the number of game balls = 500 (game balls before update) Number) -500 (number of balls counted) = 0.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 6, a CU preparation state = OFF, and a count response = ON to the P unit 2. The reason why the counting response = ON is to notify the P-unit 2 of receipt of the counting ball in response to the response of the previous status information response. At this time, the display on the display 54 is the number of game balls = 0. When the user is away from the seat, the display unit 54 does not display the number of game balls = 0, but the number of game balls before leaving (the number of game balls = 500 in this example). Ball) may be displayed. This makes it easier for other players and game hall staff to understand that they are away. Alternatively, in this case, the number of game balls may be displayed in a unique display mode (flashing, changing color, etc.) while away from the desk. This makes it easier for other players and game hall staff to understand that they are away from their seats.

  In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 7, the number of game balls = 0, the number of counting balls = 0, and the counting request = ON to the CU 3. In response to the response of the status information response, the CU 3 transmits a card return notification command including a serial number = n + 8 to the P stand 2 in order to return the card inserted into the player. In response to this, the P table 2 returns a response of a card return response including the serial number = n + 9, the card ID, and the insertion time to the CU 3 in order to notify the CU 3 of the card ID stored at the time of card insertion and the insertion time. The CU3 performs a predetermined check process as to whether or not the card ID and insertion time included in the response of the card return response and the card ID and insertion time of the card itself inserted in the CU3 match. If there is, return the card. When the card is returned, the CU 3 controls to turn on the away flag of the card to be returned to turn on the away flag stored in the card, and then ejects the card. As a result, even if the player inserts a card into the POS to exchange prizes using the card, the away flag stored in the card is ON, so the POS prohibits exchange of prizes using the card, There will be no prize exchange.

  When at least one of the card ID and the insertion time does not match, the CU 3 enters a trouble mode and does not return the card, but puts the card inside. In addition, you may control so that addition update to the number of balls with the number of counting balls = 500 transmitted from the P stand 2 may not be performed at the inappropriate time. In that case, the P stand 2 transmits the card ID and the insertion time to the CU 3 together with the counting ball number = 500, and performs the above-described checking process when the Cu 3 is received. Control is performed so as not to perform addition update to the number of 500 balls.

  Note that such an improper state in which at least one of the card ID and the insertion time does not match does not necessarily occur due to fraud. For this reason, when such a trouble occurs, a store clerk intervenes to correct the game ball data to an appropriate value.

  After returning the card, the CU 3 transmits a command for status information request including the serial number = n + 10 and the card insertion status = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 11, the number of game balls = 0, the number of counting balls = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU3.

  When the player finishes his job and returns, the inserted card is reinserted to cancel the “away from seat” state and to control the turn-off flag of the inserted card to OFF. Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 12 and a CU preparation state = ON to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 13, the number of game balls = 0, the number of counting balls = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU 3. And, when the player resumes the game, by carrying out a ball withdrawal operation for dropping the game ball from the possession ball counted and converted at the time of leaving, or a ball lending operation and a replay operation, The sequence of FIG. 46 or FIG. 48 is executed, and the game balls on the P platform 2 side are added, and the game becomes possible. Note that if the player does not return and the returned card is not inserted again after a predetermined time (for example, 30 minutes) in the “out of seat” state, It may be controlled so as to cancel the state of "." Also, when a player who has left the seat returns and inserts a card, control is performed so that the ball is automatically withdrawn and the number of game balls before leaving the seat is secured even if the player does not withdraw the ball. May be.

  The counting process at the time of leaving is different from the counting process (see FIGS. 49 and 50) performed when the counting button 28 is operated. Specifically, in the case of the counting process performed when the counting button 28 is operated, the number of game balls is gradually converted into the number of counting balls and the conversion process is displayed (FIGS. 49 and 49). 50), the counting process at the time of leaving the seat converts all the game balls to the number of counting balls in an instant as described above, and displays the converted total number of counting balls. However, the counting process performed when the counting button 28 is operated may be the same as the counting process at the time of leaving.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the return process of a membership card, a general balance card, and a general possession card will be described. In FIG. 52, the number of balls specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is “0” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “200” balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and a count response = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 200, the number of counting balls = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU3.

  Thereafter, the player performs an operation of converting the game ball into a holding ball by long-pressing the count button 28 (an operation of pressing the button for 1 second or longer). By long-pressing the count button 28, 100 balls out of the number of game balls are counted and counted as counting balls in one command / response period (200 ms). When the initial number of game balls is “200”, the number of game balls is “100” and the counting ball is “100” in one command / response period.

  However, in the counting display performed on the display 54, the number of game balls and the number of counting balls are not instantaneously changed to such numbers, but the game balls are gradually counted and decreased. The effect is such that the ball is gradually increased. For this reason, until the counting display is completed, the number of game balls and the number of points on display on the display 54 do not match the number of game balls and points on the memory on the CU side and the P side.

  However, instead of such control, the counting status (conversion status) of the points on the display may be synchronized with the actual data conversion processing. In this case, since the data counting process (conversion process) can be completed immediately, the counting display (conversion display) synchronized therewith also ends immediately. In this case, it may not be possible to sufficiently notify the player that the data has been counted. Therefore, while displaying the count, the display may be switched from the middle to the display “Counting is completed”. In this case, the card return operation may be validated from the stage when the display of “counting has been completed” is started.

  In FIG. 52, immediately after the operation of long-pressing the count button 28 is performed, a command for status information request including serial number = n + 2 and count response = OFF is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P platform 2.

  In response to the operation of the counting button 28, the P platform 2 notifies the CU of a counting request associated with the operation of the counting button 28 before starting the subtraction processing of the game balls for the counting. That is, a status information response of serial number = n + 3 with the counting request turned ON is transmitted to the CU. As shown in the figure, at this stage, the number of game balls remains 200, and the number of game balls included in the state information response of serial number = n + 3 has not changed.

  When the CU receives a count information = ON state information response, the CU determines whether counting is possible. If the count is ready, the CU transmits a status information request (here, serial number = n + 4) with the count response turned ON to the P units. .

  Then, the P units determine that counting is permitted, subtract the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the operation of the count button (here, 100 points), and update the display of the game ball number display 29 to 100. At the same time, the result is notified to the CU by a status information response. That is, as shown in the figure, in order to notify the CU 3 of the state of the number of gaming balls = 100 and the number of counting balls = 100, the serial number = n + 5, the number of gaming balls = 100, the number of counting balls = 100, and the counting request = ON are included. A response of the status information response is returned to CU3. In response to the response of the state information response, CU3 adds the counted number of balls (100 balls) to the number of balls (0 ball) and updates it to the number of balls = 100, and the number of game balls = 200 (game balls before update) Number) −100 (the number of counting balls) = 100 data is backed up.

  In response to the response of the state information response, the CU 3 performs display for counting 100 game balls in succession to the display for counting the previous 100 game balls.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 6 and a count response = ON to the P unit 2. The reason why the counting response = ON is to notify the P-unit 2 of receipt of the counting ball in response to the response of the previous status information response.

  In order to notify the CU 3 that the number of game balls = 0 and the number of count balls = 100, the P table 2 that is pressing the count button 28 for a long time has a serial number = n + 7, the number of game balls = 0, the number of count balls = 100, A response of a status information response including counting request = ON is returned to CU3. Upon receiving the response to the status information response, CU3 adds the counted number of balls (100 balls) to the number of balls (100 balls) and updates the number of balls to 200, and the number of game balls = 100 (game balls before update) Number) −100 (number of balls) = 0.

  In response to the response of the state information response, the CU 3 performs display for counting 100 game balls in succession to the display for counting the previous 100 game balls.

  As the count display progresses, the number of game balls on the display on the display 54 eventually becomes zero. The player confirms that the number of game balls has become 0 and releases the counting button 28. By releasing the count button 28, the operation of converting the game ball into a holding ball is completed.

  Thereafter, the player performs an operation of pressing the return button 322. The CU 3 transmits a command to notify the card return including the serial number = n + 8 to the P-unit 2 by performing an operation in which the player presses the return button 322. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the card return response including the serial number = n + 9, the card ID held on the payout control board 17 and the card insertion time to the CU 3.

  In response, the CU 3 compares the returned card ID and card insertion time with the card ID and card insertion time stored at the time of card insertion, and determines whether or not they match. . On the condition that they match, the card inserted in the card insertion / discharge slot 309 is returned to the player. At that time, the CU 3 transmits the card ID of the card and the data of the number of balls to the hall server 801, and the hall server 801 stores the data of the number of balls in association with the card ID of the card. If they do not match, an error is determined and error processing is executed. As the error processing, for example, control for prohibiting the return of the card in accordance with the return operation is performed to hold the card inside the CU 3, or the writing process to the holding card is prohibited. Furthermore, an error notification by an abnormality notification lamp or the like, notification of occurrence of abnormality to the hall server 801, and the like are performed. Note that when the card is returned, the hall server 801 controls the number of balls to be recorded and discharged on the card instead of storing the number of balls in association with the card ID of the card. Also good.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 10 and a card insertion state = OFF to the P unit 2. When receiving the state information response including the card insertion state = OFF, the P base 2 clears the card ID and the card insertion time data held in the payout control board 17. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 11, the number of game balls = 0, the number of counting balls = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU3.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, a process for prompting a counting operation when returning a membership card, a general balance card, or a general possession card will be described. In FIG. 53, the number of balls specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is “0” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “200” balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and a count response = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 200, the number of counting balls = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU3.

  Thereafter, the player performs an operation of pressing the return button 322. However, since CU3 has 200 balls and is not 0 balls, CU3 prohibits the card return operation and prompts the player to perform a counting operation. "Please perform the counting operation." In this way, the display for prompting the counting operation is performed, so that the player can know the reason why the card return operation cannot be performed. The CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 2 and a card insertion state = ON to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 3, the number of game balls = 200, the number of counting balls = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU3.

  Thereafter, the player performs an operation of converting the game ball into a holding ball by long-pressing the count button 28 (an operation of pressing the button for 1 second or longer). By long-pressing the count button 28, 100 balls out of the number of game balls are counted and counted as counting balls in one command / response period (200 ms). When the initial number of game balls is “200”, the number of game balls is “100” and the counting ball is “100” in one command / response period.

  In FIG. 53, immediately after the operation of long-pressing the count button 28 is performed, a command for status information request including serial number = n + 4 and count response = OFF is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2.

  In response to the operation of the counting button 28, the P platform 2 notifies the CU of a counting request associated with the operation of the counting button 28 before starting the subtraction processing of the game balls for the counting. That is, a status information response of serial number = n + 5 with the counting request turned ON is transmitted to the CU. As shown in the figure, at this stage, the number of game balls remains 200, and the number of game balls included in the state information response of serial number = n + 5 does not change.

  When the CU receives the count request = ON state information response, the CU determines whether the count is possible. If the count request is possible, the CU transmits a status information request (here, serial number = n + 6) with the count response turned ON to the P units. .

  Then, the P units determine that counting is permitted, subtract the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the operation of the count button (here, 100 points), and update the display of the game ball number display 29 to 100. The result is notified to the CU by a status information response. That is, as shown in the figure, in order to notify the CU 3 of the state of the number of gaming balls = 100 and the number of counting balls = 100, the serial number = n + 7, the number of gaming balls = 100, the number of counting balls = 100, and the counting request = ON are included. A response of the status information response is returned to CU3. In response to the response of the state information response, CU3 adds the counted number of balls (100 balls) to the number of balls (0 ball) and updates it to the number of balls = 100, and the number of game balls = 200 (game balls before update) Number) −100 (the number of counting balls) = 100 data is backed up.

  Further, the CU 3 receives a response of the state information response and starts display for counting 100 game balls.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 8 and a count response = ON to the P platform 2. The reason why the counting response = ON is to notify the P-unit 2 of receipt of the counting ball in response to the response of the previous status information response.

  In order to notify the CU 3 of the number of gaming balls = 0 and the number of counting balls = 100, the P table 2 that is long-pressing the counting button 28 has a serial number = n + 9, the number of gaming balls = 0, the number of counting balls = 100, A response of a status information response including counting request = ON is returned to CU3. Upon receiving the response to the status information response, CU3 adds the counted number of balls (100 balls) to the number of balls (100 balls) and updates the number of balls to 200, and the number of game balls = 100 (game balls before update) Number) −100 (number of balls) = 0.

  In response to the response of the state information response, the CU 3 performs display for counting 100 game balls in succession to the display for counting the previous 100 game balls.

  As the count display progresses, the number of game balls on the display on the display 54 eventually becomes zero. The player confirms that the number of game balls has become 0 and releases the counting button 28. By releasing the count button 28, the operation of converting the game ball into a holding ball is completed.

  Thereafter, the player performs an operation of pressing the return button 322. The CU 3 transmits a command to notify the card return including the serial number = n + 10 to the P unit 2 by performing an operation in which the player presses the return button 322. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the card return response including the serial number = n + 11, the card ID held on the payout control board 17 and the card insertion time to the CU 3.

  In response, the CU 3 compares the returned card ID and card insertion time with the card ID and card insertion time stored at the time of card insertion, and determines whether or not they match. . On the condition that they match, the card inserted in the card insertion / discharge slot 309 is returned to the player. If they do not match, an error is determined and error processing is executed. As the error processing, for example, control for prohibiting the return of the card in accordance with the return operation is performed to hold the card inside the CU 3, or the writing process to the holding card is prohibited. Furthermore, an error notification by an abnormality notification lamp or the like, notification of occurrence of abnormality to the hall server 801, and the like are performed.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 12 and a card insertion state = OFF to the P unit 2. When receiving the state information response including the card insertion state = OFF, the P base 2 clears the card ID and the card insertion time data held in the payout control board 17. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 13, the number of game balls = 0, the number of counting balls = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU 3.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the card return operation can be finally performed through the display of converting the game ball obtained by the game into the possession ball by the player's operation. For this reason, a game ball is counted without causing confusion to a player who is accustomed to a conventional game system that allows a ball counter obtained by counting the balls obtained by the game to be counted by each card counter. A new game system using data can be provided. In addition, if the conversion display of all game balls does not end, the card return operation will not be valid, so it is a system that does not allow you to accidentally leave the game machine and leave with game balls remaining The game can be reminiscent of the player, giving the player a sense of security.

  The game balls being counted are displayed on the display 54 on the gaming machine side and further on the gaming ball number display 29 on the gaming machine side, so that the game sitting in front of the gaming machine Makes it easier for the person to see the counting. Further, as described above, the display control unit 350 that controls the display on the gaming machine side display 54 is provided on the CU side, so that the display control burden on the gaming machine side can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, a process for automatically collecting a general card having a remaining amount of 0 yen and a holding ball of 0 balls will be described. In FIG. 54, the remaining amount specified by the inserted recording medium (member card, etc.) is “0” yen, the number of balls is “0” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “50” balls. It has become. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and a card insertion state = ON to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P table 2 notifies the CU 3 of the game table information, so that the serial number = n + 1, no game ball = OFF, game completion = OFF, the number of game balls = 20, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls A response of a status information response including = 30 is returned to CU3. In response to the notification from the P-unit 2, the CU 3 backs up the data of the number of game balls = 20, the total number of added balls = + 0, and the total number of subtracted balls = + 30.

  Thereafter, the P platform 2 detects that the number of game balls has decreased to 0 when the player plays a game (the number of game balls = 0).

  The CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 2 and a card insertion state = ON to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 sends a response of a status information response including serial number = n + 3, game ball no = ON, game completion = OFF, game ball count = 0, addition ball count = 0, subtraction ball count = 20. Reply to CU3. In response to the notification from the P stand 2, the CU 3 backs up the data of the number of game balls = 0, the cumulative number of added balls = + 0, and the total number of subtracted balls = + 20.

  After that, the P stand 2 detects that the game is completed after the number of game balls becomes zero and the floating ball (the number of balls in the game) in the game area 27 disappears. When a status information response of “game completion ON” is transmitted from the P stand 2 due to the absence of floating balls (the number of balls in the game), the CU 3 will display, for example, “Do you want to end the game?” Message may be displayed, and the player may touch the “YES” display to collect the general card.

  The CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 4 and a card insertion state = ON to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 sends a response of a status information response including serial number = n + 5, game ball no = ON, game completion = ON, game ball count = 0, addition ball count = 0, subtraction ball count = 0. Reply to CU3.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a card return notification command including the serial number = n + 6 to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the card return response including the serial number = n + 7, the card ID held on the payout control board 17 and the card insertion time to the CU 3.

  In response, the CU 3 compares the returned card ID and card insertion time with the card ID and card insertion time stored at the time of card insertion, and determines whether or not they match. . If the card matches, the collected general cards are collected. If they do not match, an error is determined and error processing is executed. As the error processing, for example, control for prohibiting the return of the card in accordance with the return operation is performed to hold the card inside the CU 3, or the writing process to the holding card is prohibited. Furthermore, an error notification by an abnormality notification lamp or the like, notification of occurrence of abnormality to the hall server 801, and the like are performed.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 8 and a card insertion state = OFF to the P unit 2. When receiving the state information response including the card insertion state = OFF, the P base 2 clears the card ID and the card insertion time data held in the payout control board 17. In response to this, the P stand 2 sends a response of a state information response including serial number = n + 9, no game ball = ON, game completion = ON, the number of game balls = 0, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls = 0. Reply to CU3.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the jackpot process during the game will be described. In FIG. 55, the number of balls “500” specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is all converted into game balls, and the initial number of game balls is “500”. Suppose that

  First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and a card insertion state = ON to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P table 2 notifies the CU 3 of the game table information, so that the serial number = n + 1, the big hit = OFF, the number of game balls = 490, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 13 The response of the response is returned to CU3. In response to the notification from the P-unit 2, the CU 3 backs up the data of the number of game balls = 490, the total number of added balls = + 3, and the total number of subtracted balls = + 13.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 2 and a card insertion state = ON to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 3, the big hit = OFF, the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 10 to the CU3. Although not shown, the CU 3 receives the notification from the P stand 2 and backs up the data of the number of game balls = 480, the total number of added balls = + 0, and the total number of subtracted balls = + 10.

  Thereafter, a big hit occurs at the P stand 2. After the big hit occurs, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 4 and a card insertion state = ON to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 5, the big hit = ON, the number of game balls = 580, the number of added balls = 120, and the number of subtracted balls = 20 to the CU3. In response to the notification from the P stand 2, the CU 3 backs up the data of the number of game balls = 580, the total number of added balls = + 120, the total number of subtracted balls = + 20, and the number of jackpots = + 1. In addition, the current cumulative number of added balls = 123 and the current cumulative number of subtracted balls = 43.

  Thereafter, the player performs a manipulation of converting the game ball into a holding ball by pressing the count button 28 once. By pressing the count button 28 once, 100 balls out of the number of game balls are counted and counted as counting balls. If the current number of game balls is “580”, the number of game balls is “480” and the count ball is “100” by pressing the count button 28 once.

  In FIG. 55, immediately after the operation of pressing the count button 28 once is performed, a command for status information request including serial number = n + 6 and count response = OFF is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2.

  In response to the operation of the counting button 28, the P platform 2 notifies the CU of a counting request associated with the operation of the counting button 28 before starting the subtraction processing of the game balls for the counting. That is, the P stand 2 includes a serial number = n + 7, a number of gaming balls = 580, a counting ball number = 0, and a counting request = ON in order to notify the CU 3 of a state where the number of gaming balls = 580 and the counting ball number = 0. A response of the status information response is returned to CU3. At this stage, the number of game balls remains 580, and the number of game balls included in the status information response of serial number = n + 6 has not changed.

  When receiving the count information = ON state information response, the CU determines whether or not the count is possible. If the count request is possible, the CU sends a status information request (in this case, serial number = n + 8) with the count response ON to the P units. .

  Then, the P units determine that counting is permitted, subtract the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the operation of the count button (here, 100 points), and update the display of the game ball number display 29 to 480. The result is notified to the CU by a status information response. That is, as shown in the drawing, in order to notify the CU 3 of the state of the number of game balls = 480 and the number of counting balls = 100, the serial number = n + 9, the number of gaming balls = 480, the number of counting balls = 100, and the counting request = ON are included. A response of the status information response is returned to CU3.

  In response to the response of the state information response, CU3 adds the counted number of balls (100 balls) to the number of balls (0 ball) and updates the number of balls to 100, and the number of game balls = 580 (game balls before update) Number) −100 (number of balls counted) = 480.

  Further, CU3 has 100 balls by counting operation, and further, the number of balls acquired in this game (= added ball total “123” balls−subtracted ball total “40” balls, or the current number of game balls) Since “580” balls + current number of held balls “0” balls—number of balls held at the start of the game “500” balls) = + 80 balls are positive, dollar box display on the display 312 is started. In this way, in the dollar box display, in order to match the conventional act of transferring the balls acquired by the player in this game to the dollar box and stacking the dollar box, the counting operation is performed and the holding ball is set to 0 balls or more. And it is executed when the number of balls acquired in this game becomes positive. Specifically, the dollar box display expresses an image in which 1000 balls are put in one dollar box, balls are filled in order from the lower dollar box, and the dollar box is stacked. In addition, when the player converts from a possession ball to a game ball, the dollar box display is displayed by reducing the number of balls from the dollar box by the number of balls converted to a game ball.

  Note that the dollar box display is not limited to the condition displayed when the number of possessed balls is 0 or more and the number of balls acquired in this game is positive, for example, acquired in this game The condition may be changed, such as displaying when the number of balls over 1000 balls. Also, the dollar box display may be displayed when the number of balls acquired in the current game is positive, regardless of the number of balls held. Furthermore, the means for displaying the number of balls and the number of balls acquired in the current game is not limited to the dollar box display, and the number of balls may be digitally displayed on the display 312. Further, instead of or in addition to the display 312, the display may be displayed on the display 54, or a dedicated display may be provided separately for display.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, a description will be given of a subtraction process from a game ball by a counting operation during a game (especially during ball firing). Here, the number of balls specified by the recording medium (member card or the like) inserted into the CU 3 is “0” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “400” balls.

  FIG. 56 shows an example in which the operation of the counting button is detected three times in total. From the viewpoint of the paper, the operation of the counting device 2 and the P platform 2 after the operation of the counting button is started. The exchange of the command and response of counting request = ON and counting response = ON performed by the CU 3 and the serial number notation are omitted.

  First, at the stage where the operation of the first counting button during the ball firing is detected, there are 400 game balls, and even if the game points are counted by the number of units (for example, 100 points), Since there is room in the ball, it is determined that counting based on the operation is possible. For this reason, although not shown, when the count request = ON state information response is transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU 3, the count information = ON state information request is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2. Is done. In response to this, the P platform 2 subtracts 100 from the number of game balls = 400, and as shown in the figure, the response of the state information response including the number of game balls = 300, the count ball count = 100, and the count request = ON is sent to the CU 3. Send back. In response to the response of the state information response, CU3 adds the counted number of balls (100 balls) to the number of balls (0 ball) and updates the number of balls to 100, and the number of game balls = 400 (game balls before update) Number) −100 (number of balls) = 300 data is backed up.

  Further, the CU 3 receives a response of the state information response and starts display for counting 100 game balls.

  Further, the player performs an operation of pressing the counting button 28 once to convert the game ball into a holding ball. When the count button 28 is pressed once for a short time, 100 balls out of the number of game balls are counted and counted as count balls. Therefore, if the current number of game balls is “300” balls, pressing the count button 28 once should result in “200” balls and “100” balls. is there.

  However, the P stand 2 is in a state where the ball is continuously fired (a state where the game is continued), and the number of game balls is successively subtracted. Therefore, depending on the timing at which the counting button 28 is short-pressed or long-pressed and the timing at which the ball is fired, there is a possibility that the number of game balls is counted redundantly between the fired ball and the counting ball. Therefore, in order to avoid the possibility of such a problem, for example, when the number of game balls is 250 or less when the ball is continuously fired, control is performed so that the subsequent counting operation is not performed. To do. The P stand 2 determines a state in which the ball is continuously fired based on, for example, the input state of the touch sensor and the state of the shot ball detection switch 903.

  Therefore, when a ball is being fired during a game, if the current number of game balls is “300”, 100 balls cannot be counted even if the count button 28 is pressed once for a short time. Only, the number of game balls is “250” balls and the counting ball is “50” balls. Similarly, if the current number of game balls is “300”, even if the count button 28 is pressed once for a long time, 100 balls cannot be counted and only 50 balls are counted, and the number of game balls is “250” balls. The counting balls become “50” balls. If the count button 28 is pressed for a long time, it is possible to count all because there is an intention to end the game.

  In order to notify the CU 3 of a change in the number of game balls and the like based on the second operation of the count button, the P stand 2 receives a status information response including the number of game balls = 250, the number of count balls = 50, and the count request = ON. Is returned to CU3. Here, “the number of gaming balls = 250, the number of counting balls = 50”, as described above, the counting operation is performed so that the number of gaming balls is 250 or less because the ball is being fired. This is because it is not executed.

  Upon receiving this status information response, CU3 adds the number of balls (50 balls) to the number of balls (100 balls) and updates the number of balls to 150, and the number of games balls = 300 (number of game balls before update). ) −50 (number of balls counted) = 250 data is backed up.

  In response to the status information response, the CU 3 performs a display for counting another 50 game balls in succession to the display for counting the previous 100 game balls. Further, CU3 indicates that a part of the counting operation has been invalidated, that the number of counting balls in the status information response is normally 100, “counting balls = 50” and “the number of gaming balls” = 250 "is specified. Therefore, the CU 3 displays on the display unit 54 that the counting operation has been invalidated in the middle (a part of the counting operation has been invalidated).

  The indication that the counting operation has been invalidated may be displayed at the moment of receiving a response of “number of counting balls = 50” as shown in the figure, or after all counting display is completed. It may be displayed. Or you may make it display continuously until the display of all the counts is complete | finished from the moment of receiving the response of "count ball number = 50". Further, specific data (bit ON / OFF) for notifying the CU that the counting operation has been invalidated in the middle may be included in the status information response.

  In this way, when the counting operation is performed during the execution of the game using the game balls and the game balls reach a predetermined number of points that are not converted any more, it is determined that the counting operation has been invalidated on the way. Therefore, the player can understand that the game balls are not counted any more.

  FIG. 56 shows an example in which an operation in which a player who is launching a ball further presses the count button 28 once to convert the game ball into a holding ball is detected. However, since the number of game balls is 250 in a state where balls are being fired in the game, the counting operation is invalidated even if the counting button 28 is pressed shortly for the same reason as described above.

  For this reason, although the count request = ON, the number of game balls remains unchanged at 250, and the status information response with the count ball count = 0 is transmitted from the P stand 2 to the CU 3. In response to this, the CU 3 determines that the counting operation is detected (counting request = ON) but the counting is not possible. In other words, the CU 3 specifies that “the counting operation is detected but invalidated”. Based on this data, the CU 3 displays on the display 54 that the counting operation has been invalidated. Note that when a counting operation to be invalidated is detected, the data “count ball number = 0, count request = ON” is transmitted only once, and in the subsequent response to the status information response, “count request = OFF " Further, specific data (bit ON / OFF) for notifying the CU that the counting operation is invalidated to the CU may be included in the status information response.

  In addition, when the counting operation is invalidated, the display of the game effect that has been performed on the display unit 54 by the display control of the effect control unit 151 until then is performed by the display control of the display control unit 350 on the CU3 side. You may make it switch to the display of.

  Here, when the ball is being fired during the game, the condition of the number of game balls for invalidating the counting operation is not limited to 250 balls or less, but the speed for counting the number of game balls, You should decide appropriately considering the speed of launching.

  As described above, when a game using a game ball is performed, the counting operation is not effective unless there are more game points than the predetermined number. The timing when the game is continued and the timing when the remaining few game balls are consumed overlap, so that the game continues even though the game balls necessary for the game have been counted as holding balls It is possible to prevent a situation from occurring. In addition, it is possible to prevent a player's disadvantage that a game ball is completely lost and a ball cannot be shot when a big hit or the like occurs.

  Next, an abnormal system sequence will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 57, a process when the power supply is disconnected and the communication circuit is disconnected before the command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2 will be described. In addition, after communication, when communication is restored, the communication partner is the same before and after the recovery, that is, when CU3 is not exchanged and P unit 2 is not exchanged (communication partner agreement after restoration). explain.

  In FIG. 57, the initial number of game balls is “500”. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23 to the CU 3.

  In response to the response of the status information response, the CU 3 backs up the data of serial number = n + 1, number of game balls = 500 (number of game balls before update) +3 (number of added balls) −23 (number of subtraction balls) = 480.

  Thereafter, a power failure occurs at CU3, and the operation of CU3 stops. However, the P stand 2 cannot detect that the operation of the CU 3 is stopped immediately after the power is cut off in the CU 3, and if the next command cannot be received from the CU 3 for one second or more, Can detect disconnection. Therefore, in the P table 2, the game table information changes depending on the game during the period from the stop of the operation of the CU 3 until the communication line is detected, and the number of game balls = 450, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36. Note that the P stand 2 stops the game when it detects the disconnection of the communication line with the CU 3 whose operation is stopped.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at CU3, and CU3 starts operating. When the CU 3 starts operating, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P unit 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU 3. The CU 3 transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2 returns the recovery information backed up in the P base 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command (recovery response). ). This recovery information includes the previous last transmission sequence number = n + 1, the previously inserted card ID, and the previous card insertion time shown in FIG.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3 determines whether or not the previously inserted card ID and the previous card insertion time of the recovery information match the stored card ID and the card insertion time. The CU 3 transmits a recovery detail request to the P unit 2 when the card ID and the card insertion time match. That is, the CU 3 transmits the recovery data to the P unit 2. This recovery data includes the previous last transmission sequence number = n + 1 and the number of additional balls shown in FIG.

  In response to this, the P machine 2 executes recovery processing based on the received recovery data, and returns the recovery data backed up inside the P machine 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response. (Recovery detailed response).

  The recovery data includes previous game table information (additional ball number = 3, subtraction ball number = 23), previous game information, latest game table information (game ball number = 450, addition ball number = 6, subtraction ball number = 36). ), The latest game information is included. Speaking of “recovery data” transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU 3, it is precisely the various data shown in FIG.

  The CU 3 that has received this detailed recovery response starts recovery processing from that point. This recovery process is a process for recovering the data consistency between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  Specifically, the CU 3 determines whether or not the card ID and the card insertion time of the recovery information of the P base 2 received by the recovery response match the stored card ID and the card insertion time. If the card ID and the card insertion time match and the last transmission sequence number being backed up = n + 1 and the last transmission sequence number of the recovery data of the P unit 2 match n + 1, the CU3 has the latest recovery data of the P unit 2 The recovery process is performed using only the game machine information. CU3 performs the recovery process and sets the number of game balls = 450, the number of added balls = + 6, and the number of subtracted balls = + 36.

  A command for displaying the number of game balls corrected by the recovery process on the display unit 54 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the display control unit 350, and the display control unit 350 displays the corrected number of game balls on the display unit 54. Control is performed. Control is also performed so that the number of game balls corrected by a recovery process described later is also displayed on the display unit 54. In addition, when displaying the number of game balls corrected by the recovery process, a message such as “recovered” may be displayed together. Further, the control may be performed so that the difference between the number of game balls at the time of power-off and the number of game balls corrected by the recovery process is also displayed. Furthermore, the number of game balls at the time of power-off and the number of game balls corrected by the recovery process may be controlled to be displayed simultaneously (parallel display). In the case of this parallel display, display control is performed so that the player can distinguish which is the number of game balls at the time of power-off and which is the number of game balls corrected by the recovery process. Further, display control may be performed in which the number of game balls at the time of power-off is displayed and gradually (temporally) changed to the number of game balls corrected by the recovery process. This change display control may be any one that changes in a digital display or one that changes in an analog display such as a bar graph.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request (recovery clear ON) command to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P unit 2 clears the recovery data. Then, the P platform 2 returns a response to the communication start response to the CU3. In response, CU3 clears the recovery data. Thereafter, a status information request command and a status information response response are transmitted and received between the CU 3 and the P platform 2. “Recovery data clear” is to erase untransmitted data at the timing of communication start / response, and after sending untransmitted data (recovery data), it is not necessary to store the data. It is deleted at the timing of communication start / response.

  Next, the abnormal sequence will be described with reference to FIG. In particular, a process when there is a power interruption and a communication circuit disconnection and a command has not reached the P unit 2 from the CU 3 will be described. Note that a case will be described in which the communication partner is the same before and after the recovery when the communication is recovered after the processing (the communication partner after the recovery is matched).

  In FIG. 58, the initial number of game balls is “500”. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23 to the CU 3.

  Thereafter, a power failure occurs at the P base 2, and the operation of the P base 2 stops. However, the game is continued until the power is cut off after the P table 2 returns the status information response response to the CU 3. Therefore, in the P table 2, the game table information changes depending on the game until the power interruption occurs, and the number of game balls = 450, the number of added balls = 6, and the number of subtracted balls = 36.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including the serial number = n + 2 to the P unit 2. However, since the P unit 2 is stopped, the CU 3 cannot receive a response for 200 milliseconds after transmitting the command, and therefore retransmits the command up to 14 times as shown in FIG. Since CU3 cannot receive a response even if the command is retransmitted, it detects a communication line disconnection, and serial number = n + 2, number of game balls = 500 (number of game balls before update) +3 (number of additional balls) −23 (subtraction ball) Number) = 480 data is backed up.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at the P base 2, and the P base 2 starts operating. When the P table 2 starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P table 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P table 2 to the CU 3. The The CU 3 transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2 returns the recovery information backed up in the P base 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command (recovery response). ). This recovery information includes the previous last transmission sequence number = n + 1, the previously inserted card ID, and the previous card insertion time shown in FIG.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3 determines whether or not the previously inserted card ID and the previous card insertion time of the recovery information match the stored card ID and the card insertion time. The CU 3 transmits a recovery detail request to the P unit 2 when the card ID and the card insertion time match. That is, the CU 3 transmits the recovery data to the P unit 2. This recovery data includes the previous last transmission sequence number = n + 2 and the number of additional balls shown in FIG.

  In response to this, the P machine 2 executes recovery processing based on the received recovery data, and returns the recovery data backed up inside the P machine 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response. (Recovery detailed response).

  The recovery data includes previous game table information (additional ball number = 3, subtraction ball number = 23), previous game information, latest game table information (game ball number = 450, addition ball number = 6, subtraction ball number = 36). ), The latest game information is included.

  The CU 3 that has received this detailed recovery response starts recovery processing from that point. This recovery process is a process for recovering the data consistency between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  Specifically, the CU 3 determines whether or not the card ID and the card insertion time of the recovery information of the P base 2 received by the recovery response match the stored card ID and the card insertion time. If the card ID and the card insertion time match and the last transmission sequence number being backed up = n + 2 is larger (newer) than the last transmission sequence number = n + 1 of the recovery data of the P unit 2, the CU3 Recovery processing is performed using only the latest game machine information of the recovery data of No. 2. CU3 performs the recovery process and sets the number of game balls = 450, the number of added balls = + 6, and the number of subtracted balls = + 36. However, if the difference between the serial numbers of CU3 and P base 2 is 2 or more (except when the serial number of CU3 or P base 2 is “0”), CU3 and P base 2 are treated as having been illegal. Do not perform an error. When such an error occurs, at least one of the CU 3 and the P base 2 notifies that fact. At that time, the content of the notification may be displayed on at least one of the indicator 312 of the CU 3 and the indicator 54 of the P stand 2. In addition, the hall server 801 may be notified to that effect so that an error has occurred in the hall server 801. Further, the number of game balls may be corrected manually using a POS or the like with the intervention of a store clerk. Specifically, the number of game balls included in the recovery data from the P-unit 2 is displayed on the display 54, and the store clerk who sees it displays the player's card in the POS and sets the card ID of the card. The holding balls stored in the hall server 801 in association with each other are updated.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request (recovery clear ON) command to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P unit 2 clears the recovery data. Then, the P platform 2 returns a response to the communication start response to the CU3. In response, CU3 clears the recovery data. Thereafter, a status information request command and a status information response response are transmitted and received between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  Next, the abnormal sequence will be described with reference to FIG. In particular, the processing when the response from the P stand 2 to the CU 3 has not yet reached due to the power interruption and the communication circuit disconnection will be described. Note that a case will be described in which the communication partner is the same before and after the recovery when the communication is recovered after the processing (the communication partner after the recovery is matched).

  In FIG. 59, the initial number of game balls is “500”. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n to the P unit 2. Thereafter, a power failure occurs at CU3, and the operation of CU3 stops. However, the P stand 2 cannot detect that the operation of the CU 3 is stopped immediately after the power is cut off in the CU 3, and if the next command cannot be received from the CU 3 for one second or more, Can detect disconnection.

  For this reason, the P unit 2 does not know that the operation of the CU3 is stopped, receives the command for requesting the status information of the CU3, the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls Response of the status information response including = 23 is returned to CU3. However, the response of the status information response sent back to CU3 does not reach CU3 because the operation of CU3 is stopped.

  Further, in the P table 2, the game table information changes depending on the game during the period from when the operation of the CU 3 stops until the communication line is detected, and the number of game balls = 450, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36. Note that the P stand 2 stops the game when it detects the disconnection of the communication line with the CU 3 whose operation is stopped.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at CU3, and CU3 starts operating. When the CU 3 starts operating, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P unit 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU 3. The CU 3 transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2 returns the recovery information backed up in the P base 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command (recovery response). ). This recovery information includes the previous last transmission sequence number = n + 1, the previously inserted card ID, and the previous card insertion time shown in FIG.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3 determines whether or not the previously inserted card ID and the previous card insertion time of the recovery information match the stored card ID and the card insertion time. The CU 3 transmits a recovery detail request to the P unit 2 when the card ID and the card insertion time match. That is, the CU 3 transmits the recovery data to the P unit 2. This recovery data includes the previous last transmission serial number = n and the number of additional balls shown in FIG.

  In response to this, the P machine 2 executes recovery processing based on the received recovery data, and returns the recovery data backed up inside the P machine 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response. (Recovery detailed response).

  The recovery data includes previous game table information (additional ball number = 3, subtraction ball number = 23), previous game information, latest game table information (game ball number = 450, addition ball number = 6, subtraction ball number = 36). ), The latest game information is included.

  The CU 3 that has received this detailed recovery response starts recovery processing from that point. This recovery process is a process for recovering the data consistency between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  Specifically, the CU 3 determines whether or not the card ID and the card insertion time of the recovery information of the P base 2 received by the recovery response match the stored card ID and the card insertion time. If the card ID and the card insertion time match and the last transmission sequence number being backed up = n is smaller (older) than the last transmission sequence number = n + 1 of the recovery data of the P unit 2, the CU3 Neither the game machine information nor the latest game machine information is received from the P machine 2, and it is determined that the operation has stopped due to the occurrence of power failure, and the recovery process is performed. However, if the difference between the serial numbers of CU3 and P base 2 is 2 or more (except when the serial number of CU3 or P base 2 is “0”), CU3 and P base 2 are treated as having been illegal. Do not perform an error.

  CU3 performs recovery processing using the previous game table information and the latest game table information of the recovery data of P table 2, and the number of game balls = 500 (number of game balls before update) + (3 + 6) (number of additional balls) − (23 + 36) (the number of subtraction balls) = 450, the number of additional balls = + (3 + 6), and the number of subtraction balls = + (23 + 36).

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request (recovery clear ON) command to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P unit 2 clears the recovery data. Then, the P platform 2 returns a response to the communication start response to the CU3. In response, CU3 clears the recovery data. Thereafter, a status information request command and a status information response response are transmitted and received between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  Next, the abnormal sequence will be described with reference to FIG. In particular, a process when an addition request command from the CU 3 to the P unit 2 has not reached due to a power interruption or a communication circuit disconnection will be described. Note that a case will be described in which the communication partner is the same before and after the recovery when the communication is recovered after the processing (the communication partner after the recovery is matched).

  In FIG. 60, the initial number of game balls is “50” balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1 and the number of game balls = 50 to the CU3.

  Thereafter, the player presses the replay button. Therefore, CU3 confirms the consumption of the stored ball, transmits a command of status information request including serial number = n + 2, game ball addition request = ON, number of added balls = 125 balls to P stand 2, and stores the ball as a game ball. Notify the converted information. At that time, CU3 backs up the data of serial number = n + 2, number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of added balls) = 175.

  However, after the player presses the replay button and before receiving the command for requesting the state information, the P stand 2 is turned off and stops operating. Therefore, the P base 2 cannot receive the status information request command from the CU 3.

  Since the P unit 2 is stopped, the CU 3 cannot receive a response for 200 milliseconds after transmitting the command, and therefore retransmits the command up to 14 times as shown in FIG. Since the CU 3 cannot receive a response even if the command is retransmitted, the CU 3 detects the disconnection of the communication line.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at the P base 2, and the P base 2 starts operating. When the P table 2 starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P table 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P table 2 to the CU 3. The The CU 3 transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2 returns the recovery information backed up in the P base 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command (recovery response). ). This recovery information includes the previous last transmission sequence number = n + 1, the previously inserted card ID, and the previous card insertion time shown in FIG.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3 determines whether or not the previously inserted card ID and the previous card insertion time of the recovery information match the stored card ID and the card insertion time. The CU 3 transmits a recovery detail request to the P unit 2 when the card ID and the card insertion time match. That is, the CU 3 transmits the recovery data to the P unit 2. This recovery data includes the last last transmission sequence number = n + 2 and the number of additional balls = 125 shown in FIG.

  In response to this, the P-unit 2 determines whether or not the communication partner before the power cut-off matches the communication partner after the power-off recovery. When the communication partner is the same and the last transmission sequence number being backed up = n + 1 is smaller (older) than the last transmission sequence number = n + 2 of the recovery data of CU3, the P unit 2 executes recovery processing. The number of game balls is corrected with the number of added balls, and the number of game balls is updated to 50 + 125.

  Further, the P unit 2 returns the recovery data backed up inside the P unit 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response (recovery detailed response).

  This recovery data includes previous game table information, previous game information, latest game table information (number of game balls = 175), and latest game information.

  The CU 3 that has received this detailed recovery response starts recovery processing from that point. This recovery process is a process for recovering the data consistency between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  Specifically, the CU 3 determines whether or not the card ID and the card insertion time of the recovery information of the P base 2 received by the recovery response match the stored card ID and the card insertion time. When the card ID and the card insertion time match and the last transmission sequence number being backed up = n + 2 is larger (newer) than the last transmission sequence number = n + 1 of the recovery data of the P unit 2, the CU3 The recovery process is performed using only the latest game machine information of the recovery data of the machine 2. CU3 performs the recovery process and sets the number of game balls = 175. However, if the difference between the serial numbers of CU3 and P base 2 is 2 or more (except when the serial number of CU3 or P base 2 is “0”), CU3 and P base 2 are treated as having been illegal. Do not perform an error.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request (recovery clear ON) command to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P unit 2 clears the recovery data. Then, the P platform 2 returns a response to the communication start response to the CU3. In response, CU3 clears the recovery data. Thereafter, a status information request command and a status information response response are transmitted and received between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  Here, a case where a replay button for starting a game by paying out a stored ball has been described has been described, but the same operation is performed when a ball paying button for starting a game by paying out a ball is pressed.

  Next, the abnormal sequence will be described with reference to FIG. In particular, the processing when the response of the addition response from the P base 2 to the CU 3 has not reached due to power interruption or communication circuit disconnection will be described. Note that a case will be described in which the communication partner is the same before and after the recovery when the communication is recovered after the processing (the communication partner after the recovery is matched).

  In FIG. 61, the initial number of game balls is “50” balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1 and the number of game balls = 50 to the CU3.

  Thereafter, the player presses the replay button. Therefore, CU3 confirms the consumption of the stored ball, transmits a command of status information request including serial number = n + 2, game ball addition request = ON, number of added balls = 125 balls to P stand 2, and stores the ball as a game ball. Notify the converted information. At that time, CU3 backs up the data of serial number = n + 2, number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of added balls) = 175.

  Thereafter, a power failure occurs at CU3, and the operation of CU3 stops. However, the P stand 2 cannot detect that the operation of the CU 3 is stopped immediately after the power is cut off in the CU 3, and if the next command cannot be received from the CU 3 for one second or more, Can detect disconnection.

  For this reason, the P unit 2 does not know that the operation of the CU3 is stopped, receives a command for requesting the state information of the CU3, and includes a serial number = n + 3, the number of game balls = 175, and a game ball addition result = OK. The response of the information response is returned to CU3. However, the response of the status information response sent back to CU3 does not reach CU3 because the operation of CU3 is stopped. In addition, in the P stand 2, the response of the status information response is returned to the CU 3, and the data of the serial number = n + 3 and the number of game balls = 175 is backed up.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at CU3, and CU3 starts operating. When the CU 3 starts operating, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P unit 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU 3. The CU 3 transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2 returns the recovery information backed up in the P base 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command (recovery response). ). This recovery information includes the previous last transmission sequence number = n + 3, the previously inserted card ID, and the previous card insertion time shown in FIG.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3 determines whether or not the previously inserted card ID and the previous card insertion time of the recovery information match the stored card ID and the card insertion time. The CU 3 transmits a recovery detail request to the P unit 2 when the card ID and the card insertion time match. That is, the CU 3 transmits the recovery data to the P unit 2. This recovery data includes the last last transmission sequence number = n + 2 and the number of additional balls = 125 shown in FIG.

  In response to this, the P-unit 2 determines whether or not the communication partner before the power cut-off matches the communication partner after the power-off recovery. The number of game balls is added when the communication partner is the same and the last transmission sequence number being backed up = n + 3 is larger (newer) than the last transmission sequence number = n + 2 of the recovery data of CU3. Do not correct with the number of balls.

  Further, the P unit 2 returns the recovery data backed up inside the P unit 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response (recovery detailed response).

  This recovery data includes previous game table information, previous game information, latest game table information (number of game balls = 175), and latest game information.

  The CU 3 that has received this detailed recovery response starts recovery processing from that point. This recovery process is a process for recovering the data consistency between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  Specifically, the CU 3 determines whether or not the card ID and the card insertion time of the recovery information of the P base 2 received by the recovery response match the stored card ID and the card insertion time. If the card ID and the card insertion time match and the last transmission sequence number being backed up = n + 2 is smaller (older) than the last transmission sequence number = n + 3 of the recovery data of the P unit 2, the CU3 Recovery processing is performed using the previous game machine information and the latest game machine information of the recovery data of the machine 2. CU3 performs the recovery process and sets the number of game balls = 175. However, if the difference between the serial numbers of CU3 and P base 2 is 2 or more (except when the serial number of CU3 or P base 2 is “0”), CU3 and P base 2 are treated as having been illegal. Do not perform an error.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request (recovery clear ON) command to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P unit 2 clears the recovery data. Then, the P platform 2 returns a response to the communication start response to the CU3. In response, CU3 clears the recovery data. Thereafter, a status information request command and a status information response response are transmitted and received between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  Here, a case where a replay button for starting a game by paying out a stored ball has been described has been described, but the same operation is performed when a ball paying button for starting a game by paying out a ball is pressed.

  Next, the abnormal sequence will be described with reference to FIG. In particular, the processing when the power supply is disconnected and the communication circuit is disconnected before the command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2 will be described. Note that, after communication, when communication is restored, the communication partner does not match before and after the recovery. Specifically, the case where the CU 3 has failed and replaced with a new CU 3 (communication partner mismatch after recovery) will be described. . When it is exchanged for a new CU3, the card inserted in the CU3 before the exchange is discharged to the player, and if the player wants to continue the game with the same P stand 2, the card is inserted. Insert into CU3 after replacement.

  In FIG. 62, the initial number of game balls is “500”. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23 to the CU 3.

  In response to the response of the status information response, the CU 3 backs up the data of serial number = n + 1, number of game balls = 500 (number of game balls before update) +3 (number of added balls) −23 (number of subtraction balls) = 480.

  Thereafter, a power failure occurs at CU3, and the operation of CU3 stops. However, the P stand 2 cannot detect that the operation of the CU 3 is stopped immediately after the power is cut off in the CU 3, and if the next command cannot be received from the CU 3 for one second or more, Can detect disconnection. Therefore, in the P table 2, the game table information changes depending on the game during the period from the stop of the operation of the CU 3 until the communication line is detected, and the number of game balls = 450, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36. Note that the P stand 2 stops the game when it detects the disconnection of the communication line with the CU 3 whose operation is stopped.

  After power failure occurs at CU3, for example, due to failure of CU3, CU3 is replaced and changed from primary station (1) to primary station (2). Thereafter, the power failure is restored at CU3, and CU3 starts operating. When the CU 3 starts operating, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P unit 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU 3. The CU 3 transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2 returns the recovery information backed up in the P base 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command (recovery response). ). This recovery information includes the previous last transmission sequence number = n + 1, the previously inserted card ID, and the previous card insertion time shown in FIG.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3 determines whether or not the previously inserted card ID and the previous card insertion time of the recovery information match the stored card ID and the card insertion time. The CU 3 transmits a recovery detail request to the P unit 2 when the card ID and the card insertion time match. That is, the CU 3 transmits the recovery data to the P unit 2. This recovery data includes the last last transmission serial number = 0 and the number of additional balls = 125 shown in FIG.

  In response to this, the P machine 2 executes recovery processing based on the received recovery data, and returns the recovery data backed up inside the P machine 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response. (Recovery detailed response).

  The recovery data includes previous game table information (additional ball number = 3, subtraction ball number = 23), previous game information, latest game table information (game ball number = 450, addition ball number = 6, subtraction ball number = 36). ), The latest game information is included.

  The CU 3 that has received this detailed recovery response starts recovery processing from that point. This recovery process is a process for recovering the data consistency between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  Specifically, the CU 3 determines that the CU 3 has been exchanged due to the last transmission sequence number of the CU being backed up = 0, and receives the card ID and the recovery response received from the recovery response. The CU 3 compares the card ID of the recovery data of the base 2. This “last transmission sequence number = 0” indicates that the CU 3 and the P base 2 are not connected and are not in communication. That is, information indicating that the CU 3 does not communicate with the gaming machine is “final transmission sequence number = 0”.

  Further, since the CU 3 has been exchanged, the insertion time of the card inserted into the CU 3 before the exchange is not stored. On the other hand, the hall server 801 stores the card ID, the card insertion time, and the chip information of the P table 2 that are transmitted from the CU 3 in association with each other. Therefore, the CU 3 sends the chip information (main chip ID and payout chip ID) received from the P platform 2 in the authentication sequence to the hall server 801, and returns the card insertion time stored in association with it from the hall server 801. do that for me. The CU 3 compares the returned card insertion time with the card insertion time of the recovery data of the P base 2 and determines whether or not they match. If the card inserted in the CU3 before the exchange is discharged to the player and the player inserts the card into the CU3 after the exchange in order to continue playing on the same P stand 2, A determination is made that there is. When a card different from the card inserted into the CU 3 before replacement is inserted into the CU 3 after replacement, a mismatch determination is made.

  Instead of having the card insertion time returned from the hall server 801, the hall server 801 may make a match determination. Specifically, when the card ID of the card inserted into the replaced CU 3 matches the card ID of the recovery data, the card ID and the card insertion time of the recovery data are transmitted to the hall server 801, and the hall server At 801, the stored card insertion time and the card insertion time of the transmitted recovery data may be compared to determine whether they match, and control may be performed so as to return the determination result to CU3. .

  Further, the storage location such as the card insertion time is not limited to the hall server 801. For example, a card unit holder in which the CU 3 is installed may be stored. Further, when the card is ejected from the failed CU 3, it is stored in the card. You may leave it.

  These modifications are also applicable to FIGS. 64 and 66 described later. The CU3 has the same card ID and the same card insertion time, and the last transmission sequence number being backed up = 0 is smaller (older) than the last transmission sequence number = n + 1 of the recovery data of the P unit 2. If the last transmission serial number is “0”, the recovery process is performed using only the latest gaming machine information of the recovery data of the P machine 2. CU3 performs the recovery process and sets the number of game balls = 450, the number of added balls = + 6, and the number of subtracted balls = + 36.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request (recovery clear ON) command to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P unit 2 clears the recovery data. Then, the P platform 2 returns a response to the communication start response to the CU3. In response, CU3 clears the recovery data. Thereafter, a status information request command and a status information response response are transmitted and received between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  Next, the abnormal sequence will be described with reference to FIG. In particular, a process when there is a power interruption and a communication circuit disconnection and a command has not reached the P unit 2 from the CU 3 will be described. Note that a case where the communication partners do not match before and after the recovery when the communication is recovered after the processing (the communication partner mismatch after the recovery) will be described.

  In FIG. 63, the initial number of game balls is “500”. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23 to the CU 3.

  Thereafter, a power failure occurs at the P base 2, and the operation of the P base 2 stops. However, the game is continued until the power is cut off after the P table 2 returns the status information response response to the CU 3. Therefore, in the P table 2, the game table information changes depending on the game until the power interruption occurs, and the number of game balls = 450, the number of added balls = 6, and the number of subtracted balls = 36.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including the serial number = n + 2 to the P unit 2. However, since the P unit 2 is stopped, the CU 3 cannot receive a response for 200 milliseconds after transmitting the command, and therefore retransmits the command up to 14 times as shown in FIG. Since CU3 cannot receive a response even if the command is retransmitted, it detects a communication line disconnection, and serial number = n + 2, number of game balls = 500 (number of game balls before update) +3 (number of additional balls) −23 (subtraction ball) Number) = 480 data is backed up.

  After the power failure occurs at the P base 2, for example, the P base 2 is out of order, so the P base 2 is replaced and changed from the secondary station (1) to the secondary station (2). Thereafter, the power failure is restored at the P base 2, and the P base 2 starts operating. When the P table 2 starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P table 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P table 2 to the CU 3. The The CU 3 transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2 returns the recovery information backed up in the P base 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command (recovery response). ). However, the recovery information is not held because the P unit 2 is replaced. Therefore, the recovery information includes previous last transmission sequence number = 0, previous inserted card ID = 0, and previous card insertion time = 0.

  The CU 3 that has received this recovery response determines whether or not the previously inserted card ID and the previous card insertion time of the recovery information match the backed up card ID and the card insertion time. On the CU 3 side, the card ID and the card insertion time of the player's card that was playing are backed up, and do not match the previous card ID and the previous card insertion time transmitted from the P unit 2. Moreover, the transmitted serial number = 0 and the serial number backed up by CU3 = n + 2 do not match. As a result, the CU 3 determines that the P base 2 has been replaced and does not perform the recovery process. That is, the CU 3 does not transmit a recovery detail request to the P unit 2. For this reason, the recovery process of the CU 3 is manually performed using a POS with the intervention of a store clerk.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request (recovery clear ON) command to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P unit 2 clears the recovery data. Then, the P platform 2 returns a response to the communication start response to the CU3. In response, CU3 clears the recovery data. Thereafter, a status information request command and a status information response response are transmitted and received between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  Next, an abnormal system sequence will be described with reference to FIG. In particular, the processing when the response from the P stand 2 to the CU 3 has not yet reached due to the power interruption and the communication circuit disconnection will be described. Note that a case will be described in which communication partners are not matched before and after the restoration (communication partner mismatch after restoration) when communication is restored after the processing.

  In FIG. 64, the initial number of game balls is “500”. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n to the P unit 2. Thereafter, a power failure occurs at CU3, and the operation of CU3 stops. However, the P stand 2 cannot detect that the operation of the CU 3 is stopped immediately after the power is cut off in the CU 3, and if the next command cannot be received from the CU 3 for one second or more, Can detect disconnection.

  For this reason, the P unit 2 does not know that the operation of the CU3 is stopped, receives the command for requesting the status information of the CU3, the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls Response of the status information response including = 23 is returned to CU3. However, the response of the status information response sent back to CU3 does not reach CU3 because the operation of CU3 is stopped.

  Further, in the P table 2, the game table information changes depending on the game during the period from when the operation of the CU 3 stops until the communication line is detected, and the number of game balls = 450, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36. Note that the P stand 2 stops the game when it detects the disconnection of the communication line with the CU 3 whose operation is stopped.

  After power failure occurs at CU3, for example, due to failure of CU3, CU3 is replaced and changed from primary station (1) to primary station (2). Thereafter, the power failure is restored at CU3, and CU3 starts operating. When the CU 3 starts operating, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P unit 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU 3. The CU 3 transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2 returns the recovery information backed up in the P base 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command (recovery response). ). This recovery information includes the previous last transmission sequence number = n + 1, the previously inserted card ID, and the previous card insertion time shown in FIG.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3 determines whether or not the previously inserted card ID and the previous card insertion time of the recovery information match the stored card ID and the card insertion time. The CU 3 transmits a recovery detail request to the P unit 2 when the card ID and the card insertion time match. That is, the CU 3 transmits the recovery data to the P unit 2. This recovery data includes the previous last transmission sequence number = 0 shown in FIG. 31 and the number of additional balls.

  In response to this, the P machine 2 executes recovery processing based on the received recovery data, and returns the recovery data backed up inside the P machine 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response. (Recovery detailed response).

  The recovery data includes previous game table information (additional ball number = 3, subtraction ball number = 23), previous game information, latest game table information (game ball number = 450, addition ball number = 6, subtraction ball number = 36). ), The latest game information is included.

  The CU 3 that has received this detailed recovery response starts recovery processing from that point. This recovery process is a process for recovering the data consistency between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  Specifically, the CU 3 determines that the CU 3 has been exchanged due to the last transmission sequence number of the CU being backed up = 0, and receives the card ID and the recovery response received from the recovery response. The CU 3 compares the card ID of the recovery information of the stand 2. Further, since the CU 3 has been exchanged, the insertion time of the card inserted into the CU 3 before the exchange is not stored. On the other hand, the hall server 801 stores the card ID, the card insertion time, and the chip information of the P table 2 that are transmitted from the CU 3 in association with each other. Therefore, the CU 3 sends the chip information (main chip ID and payout chip ID) received from the P platform 2 in the authentication sequence to the hall server 801, and returns the card insertion time stored in association with it from the hall server 801. do that for me. The CU 3 compares the returned card insertion time with the card insertion time of the recovery data of the P base 2 and determines whether or not they match. If the card inserted in the CU3 before the exchange is discharged to the player and the player inserts the card into the CU3 after the exchange in order to continue playing on the same P stand 2, A determination is made that there is. When a card different from the card inserted into the CU 3 before replacement is inserted into the CU 3 after replacement, a mismatch determination is made.

  The CU3 has the same card ID and the same card insertion time, and the last transmission sequence number being backed up = 0 is smaller (older) than the last transmission sequence number = n + 1 of the recovery data of the P unit 2. If the last transmission serial number is “0”, the recovery process is performed using only the latest gaming machine information of the recovery data of the P machine 2. CU3 performs the recovery process and sets the number of game balls = 450, the number of added balls = + 6, and the number of subtracted balls = + 36.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request (recovery clear ON) command to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P unit 2 clears the recovery data. Then, the P platform 2 returns a response to the communication start response to the CU3. In response, CU3 clears the recovery data. Thereafter, a status information request command and a status information response response are transmitted and received between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  Next, the abnormal sequence will be described with reference to FIG. In particular, a process when an addition request command from the CU 3 to the P unit 2 has not reached due to a power interruption or a communication circuit disconnection will be described. Note that a case where the communication partners do not match before and after the recovery when the communication is recovered after the processing (the communication partner mismatch after the recovery) will be described.

  In FIG. 65, the initial number of game balls is “50” balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1 and the number of game balls = 50 to the CU3.

  Thereafter, the player presses the replay button. Therefore, CU3 confirms the consumption of the stored ball, transmits a command of status information request including serial number = n + 2, game ball addition request = ON, number of added balls = 125 balls to P stand 2, and stores the ball as a game ball. Notify the converted information. At that time, CU3 backs up the data of serial number = n + 2, number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of added balls) = 175.

  However, after the player presses the replay button and before receiving the command for requesting the state information, the P stand 2 is turned off and stops operating. Therefore, the P base 2 cannot receive the status information request command from the CU 3.

  Since the P unit 2 is stopped, the CU 3 cannot receive a response for 200 milliseconds after transmitting the command, and therefore retransmits the command up to 14 times as shown in FIG. Since the CU 3 cannot receive a response even if the command is retransmitted, the CU 3 detects the disconnection of the communication line.

  After the power failure occurs at the P base 2, for example, the P base 2 is out of order, so the P base 2 is replaced and changed from the secondary station (1) to the secondary station (2). Thereafter, the power failure is restored at the P base 2, and the P base 2 starts operating. When the P table 2 starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P table 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P table 2 to the CU 3. The The CU 3 transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2 returns the recovery information backed up in the P base 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command (recovery response). ). However, the recovery information is not held because the P unit 2 is replaced. Therefore, the recovery information includes previous last transmission sequence number = 0, previous inserted card ID = 0, and previous card insertion time = 0.

  The CU 3 that has received this recovery response determines whether or not the previously inserted card ID and the previous card insertion time of the recovery information match the backed up card ID and the card insertion time. On the CU 3 side, the card ID and the card insertion time of the player's card that was playing are backed up, and do not match the previous card ID and the previous card insertion time transmitted from the P unit 2. Moreover, the transmitted serial number = 0 and the serial number backed up by CU3 = n + 2 do not match. As a result, the CU 3 determines that the P base 2 has been replaced and does not perform the recovery process. That is, the CU 3 does not transmit a recovery detail request to the P unit 2. For this reason, the recovery process of the CU 3 is manually performed using a POS with the intervention of a store clerk.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request (recovery clear ON) command to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P unit 2 clears the recovery data. Then, the P platform 2 returns a response to the communication start response to the CU3. In response, CU3 clears the recovery data. Thereafter, a status information request command and a status information response response are transmitted and received between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  Here, a case where a replay button for starting a game by paying out a stored ball has been described has been described, but the same operation is performed when a ball paying button for starting a game by paying out a ball is pressed.

  Next, an abnormal sequence will be described with reference to FIG. In particular, the processing when the response of the addition response from the P base 2 to the CU 3 has not reached due to power interruption or communication circuit disconnection will be described. Note that a case where the communication partners do not match before and after the recovery when the communication is recovered after the processing (the communication partner mismatch after the recovery) will be described.

  In FIG. 66, the initial number of game balls is “50”. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1 and the number of game balls = 50 to the CU3.

  Thereafter, the player presses the replay button. Therefore, CU3 confirms the consumption of the stored ball, transmits a command of status information request including serial number = n + 2, game ball addition request = ON, number of added balls = 125 balls to P stand 2, and stores the ball as a game ball. Notify the converted information. At that time, CU3 backs up the data of serial number = n + 2, number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of added balls) = 175.

  Thereafter, a power failure occurs at CU3, and the operation of CU3 stops. However, the P stand 2 cannot detect that the operation of the CU 3 is stopped immediately after the power is cut off in the CU 3, and if the next command cannot be received from the CU 3 for one second or more, Can detect disconnection.

  For this reason, the P unit 2 does not know that the operation of the CU3 is stopped, receives a command for requesting the state information of the CU3, and includes a serial number = n + 3, the number of game balls = 175, and a game ball addition result = OK. The response of the information response is returned to CU3. However, the response of the status information response sent back to CU3 does not reach CU3 because the operation of CU3 is stopped. In addition, in the P stand 2, the response of the status information response is returned to the CU 3, and the data of the serial number = n + 3 and the number of game balls = 175 is backed up.

  After power failure occurs at CU3, for example, due to failure of CU3, CU3 is replaced and changed from primary station (1) to primary station (2). Thereafter, the power failure is restored at CU3, and CU3 starts operating. When the CU 3 starts operating, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P unit 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU 3. The CU 3 transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2 returns the recovery information backed up in the P base 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command (recovery response). ). This recovery information includes the previous last transmission sequence number = n + 1, the previously inserted card ID, and the previous card insertion time shown in FIG.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3 determines whether or not the previously inserted card ID and the previous card insertion time of the recovery information match the stored card ID and the card insertion time. The CU 3 transmits a recovery detail request to the P unit 2 when the card ID and the card insertion time match. That is, the CU 3 transmits the recovery data to the P unit 2. This recovery data includes the previous last transmission sequence number = 0 shown in FIG. 31 and the number of additional balls.

  In response to this, the P-unit 2 determines whether or not the communication partner before the power cut-off matches the communication partner after the power-off recovery. This determination is made based on the fact that the “last transmission sequence number” transmitted in the recovery request is 0. In the P stand 2, the CU 3 determines that the communication partners do not match, and does not correct the number of game balls with the number of added balls.

  Further, the P unit 2 returns the recovery data backed up inside the P unit 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response (recovery detailed response).

  This recovery data includes previous game table information, previous game information, latest game table information (number of game balls = 175), and latest game information.

  The CU 3 that has received this detailed recovery response starts recovery processing from that point. This recovery process is a process for recovering the data consistency between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  Specifically, the CU 3 determines that the CU 3 has been exchanged due to the last transmission sequence number of the CU being backed up = 0, and receives the card ID and the recovery response received from the recovery response. The CU 3 compares the card ID of the recovery information of the stand 2. Further, since the CU 3 has been exchanged, the insertion time of the card inserted into the CU 3 before the exchange is not stored. On the other hand, the hall server 801 stores the card ID, the card insertion time, and the chip information of the P table 2 that are transmitted from the CU 3 in association with each other. Therefore, the CU 3 sends the chip information (main chip ID and payout chip ID) received from the P platform 2 in the authentication sequence to the hall server 801, and returns the card insertion time stored in association with it from the hall server 801. do that for me. The CU 3 compares the returned card insertion time with the card insertion time of the recovery data of the P base 2 and determines whether or not they match. If the card inserted in the CU3 before the exchange is discharged to the player and the player inserts the card into the CU3 after the exchange in order to continue playing on the same P stand 2, A determination is made that there is. When a card different from the card inserted into the CU 3 before replacement is inserted into the CU 3 after replacement, a mismatch determination is made.

  CU3 has the same card ID and the same card insertion time, and the last transmission sequence number being backed up = 0 is smaller (older) than the last transmission sequence number of recovery data of P unit 2 = n + 3. If the last transmission serial number is “0”, the recovery process is performed using only the latest gaming machine information of the recovery data of the P machine 2. CU3 performs the recovery process and sets the number of game balls = 175.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request (recovery clear ON) command to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P unit 2 clears the recovery data. Then, the P platform 2 returns a response to the communication start response to the CU3. In response, CU3 clears the recovery data. Thereafter, a status information request command and a status information response response are transmitted and received between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  Here, a case where a replay button for starting a game by paying out a stored ball has been described has been described, but the same operation is performed when a ball paying button for starting a game by paying out a ball is pressed.

  Next, the abnormal sequence will be described with reference to FIG. Here, in particular, a description will be given of processing when a command for requesting addition from the CU 3 to the P unit 2 has not yet reached due to power interruption or communication circuit disconnection.

  FIG. 67 shows an abnormal system sequence in the case where a power failure occurs at the P machines before the game ball addition request transmitted from the CU reaches the P machine side, and then the power interruption is restored. In this abnormal sequence, a description will be given of a case where communication partners match before and after recovery when communication is recovered (communication partner match after recovery). For this reason, in this abnormal system sequence, neither the CU nor the P base is exchanged.

  As shown in FIG. 67, when the pressing of the replay button is detected, the CU side confirms the consumption of the stored balls, and the number of game balls is added (+125) by the consumed amount, and the number of added balls = 125. The status information request including the game ball addition request is transmitted to the P units. However, before the status information request reaches the P units, the power supply is temporarily cut off on the P unit side. For this reason, the status information request including the game ball addition request does not reach the P units.

  Thereafter, when the power interruption is restored, the recovery request and the recovery response are exchanged through the authentication sequence as described above, and the recovery detail request is transmitted from the CU side. This detailed recovery request includes the number of added balls of the game ball addition request that has not been reached = 125. P units are included in the recovery details request because their communication partners match, the final transmission sequence number included in the recovery request is n + 2 (CU sequence number), and the P unit sequence number stored on the P unit side is n + 1. The number of game balls is corrected to 50 + 125 using the added number of balls = 125 as correction data. As a result, the number of game balls stored on the CU side matches the number of game balls stored on the P table side.

  Thereafter, a recovery detail response is returned from the P platform to the CU. Then, it is determined that the card ID and the insertion time match on the CU side, and the serial numbers of the CU and the P unit match, and recovery is performed.

  In this way, even when information indicating a change in the number of game balls is transmitted from the CU to the P units and the power is cut off before the information arrives, the game on the P unit side is performed by the recovery process at the time of power-off recovery. Since the number of balls is corrected, it is possible to maintain the consistency of the game ball data between the CU and the P units even after recovery from power failure.

  The sequence will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. In FIG. 67, the initial number of game balls is “50” balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1 and the number of game balls = 50 to the CU3.

  Thereafter, the player presses the replay button. Therefore, CU3 confirms the consumption of the stored ball, transmits a command of status information request including serial number = n + 2, game ball addition request = ON, number of added balls = 125 balls to P stand 2, and stores the ball as a game ball. Notify the converted information. At that time, CU3 backs up the data of serial number = n + 2, number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of added balls) = 175.

  However, after the player presses the replay button and before receiving the command for requesting the state information, the P stand 2 is turned off and stops operating. Therefore, the P base 2 cannot receive the status information request command from the CU 3.

  Since the P unit 2 is stopped, the CU 3 cannot receive a response for 200 milliseconds after transmitting the command, and therefore retransmits the command up to 14 times as shown in FIG. Since the CU 3 cannot receive a response even if the command is retransmitted, the CU 3 detects the disconnection of the communication line.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at the P base 2, and the P base 2 starts operating. When the P table 2 starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P table 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P table 2 to the CU 3. The The CU 3 transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2 returns the recovery information backed up in the P base 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command (recovery response). ). This recovery information includes the previous last transmission sequence number = n + 1, the previously inserted card ID, and the previous card insertion time shown in FIG.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3 determines whether or not the previously inserted card ID and the previous card insertion time of the recovery information match the stored card ID and the card insertion time. The CU 3 transmits a recovery detail request to the P unit 2 when the card ID and the card insertion time match. That is, the CU 3 transmits the recovery data to the P unit 2. This recovery data includes the last last transmission sequence number = n + 2 and the number of additional balls = 125 shown in FIG.

  In response to this, the P-unit 2 determines whether or not the communication partner before the power cut-off matches the communication partner after the power-off recovery. When the communication partner is the same and the last transmission sequence number being backed up = n + 1 is smaller (older) than the last transmission sequence number = n + 2 of the recovery data of CU3, the P unit 2 executes recovery processing. The number of game balls is corrected with the number of added balls, and the number of game balls is updated to 50 + 125.

  Further, the P unit 2 returns the recovery data backed up inside the P unit 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response (recovery detailed response).

  This recovery data includes previous game table information, previous game information, latest game table information (number of game balls = 175), and latest game information.

  The CU 3 that has received this detailed recovery response starts recovery processing from that point. This recovery process is a process for recovering the data consistency between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  Specifically, the CU 3 determines whether or not the card ID and the card insertion time of the recovery information of the P base 2 received by the recovery response match the stored card ID and the card insertion time. When the card ID and the card insertion time match and the last transmission sequence number being backed up = n + 2 is larger (newer) than the last transmission sequence number = n + 1 of the recovery data of the P unit 2, the CU3 The recovery process is performed using only the latest game machine information of the recovery data of the machine 2. CU3 performs the recovery process and sets the number of game balls = 175. However, if the difference between the serial numbers of CU3 and P base 2 is 2 or more (except when the serial number of CU3 or P base 2 is “0”), CU3 and P base 2 are treated as having been illegal. Do not perform an error.

  Note that, in the communication disabled state, the gaming point changes on the gaming device side, and the change of the gaming point on the gaming device side is transmitted to the gaming machine by the restoration process, and the gaming point is updated (corrected) on the gaming machine side. A specific example of the case is shown in FIG. According to FIG. 67, “the game device recovers from the incommunicable state in which communication with the game device cannot be performed and recovers the consistency of the game points with the game device. The game device includes a recovery processing unit that performs a change amount of the game point specified by the specifying unit during a period from when the communication disabled state occurs until a recovery process is executed by the gaming device. When the restoration process is performed, the gaming device stores a cumulative change amount of game points stored in the cumulative communication time non-communication means when the restoration process is performed. “Transmit identifiable cumulative update information to the gaming device” is disclosed.

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 57 to 67, as a correction mode at the time of recovery processing, the CU3 compares the last transmission sequence number received from the P unit 2 with the stored P unit 2 final transmission sequence number. If the last transmission sequence number received from P table 2 is larger than the stored P table 2 last transmission sequence number, the number of game balls is corrected using both the latest game table information and the previous game table information. There is a first correction mode. The other correction mode is that the CU 3 compares the last transmission sequence number received from the P unit 2 with the stored P unit final transmission sequence number, and the last transmission sequence number received from the P unit 2 is stored. There is a second correction mode in which the number of game balls is corrected only with the latest game table information if the sequence number is equal to or smaller than the P number last transmission sequence number. Furthermore, the correction mode during the recovery process includes a mode in which no correction is performed (see FIGS. 63 and 65). In other words, "determining the correction mode" means not only determining whether to correct using only the latest gaming machine information or using both the latest gaming machine information and the previous gaming machine information, but also not correcting It is a concept that encompasses decisions.

  In addition, the first correction mode specifically adds the number of balls added in the latest game table information and the number of balls added in the previous game table information to the number of game balls stored in the CU 3, and the latest game The number of balls subtracted from the table information and the number of balls subtracted from the previous game table information are subtracted to correct the number of game balls calculated. Specifically, the second correction mode was calculated by adding the number of balls added in the latest game table information to the number of game balls stored in CU3 and subtracting the number of balls subtracted in the latest game table information. Correct to the number of game balls.

  Next, the abnormal sequence will be described with reference to FIG. In particular, the processing when the game ball addition result is abnormal at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and saving ball payout will be described.

  In FIG. 68, the initial number of game balls is “50”. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and a game ball addition request = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1 and the number of game balls = 50 to the CU3.

  Thereafter, the player presses the possession payout button. Therefore, CU3 confirms the consumption of holding balls / storing balls, sends a command of status information request including serial number = n + 2, gaming ball addition request = ON, number of adding balls = 125 balls to P stand 2,・ Notify the information that converted the stored ball into a game ball. At that time, CU3 backs up the data of serial number = n + 2, number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of added balls) = 175.

  Thereafter, an abnormality occurs in the process of adding game balls on the P platform 2. Therefore, upon receiving the command for requesting the state information of CU3, the P stand 2 receives a state information response including serial number = n + 3, number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before game ball addition), game ball addition result = NG. A response is returned to CU3.

  The CU 3 that has received the response of the status information response including the game ball addition result = NG resends the command of the status information request including the serial number = n + 2, the game ball addition request = ON, and the number of added balls = 125 balls to the P unit 2. . Since CU3 is a retransmission of the status information request command, it does not update the serial number and retransmits the status information request command with the serial number = n + 2.

  However, the P stand 2 remains in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the process of adding game balls. Therefore, the P table 2 receives the command of the retransmitted status information request from the CU 3, and receives the serial number = n + 3, the number of game balls = 50 (the number of game balls before the game ball addition), and the status information including the game ball addition result = NG. The response of the response is returned to CU3.

  Further, the CU3 that has received the response of the state information response including the game ball addition result = NG again receives the command of the state information request including the serial number = n + 2, the game ball addition request = ON, and the number of additional balls = 125 balls. To the second retransmission. Since CU3 is a retransmission of the status information request command, it does not update the serial number and retransmits the status information request command with the serial number = n + 2.

  P stand 2 is still in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the process of adding game balls. Therefore, the P table 2 receives the command of the retransmitted status information request from the CU 3, and receives the serial number = n + 3, the number of game balls = 50 (the number of game balls before the game ball addition), and the status information including the game ball addition result = NG. The response of the response is returned to CU3.

  Processing for adding a game ball in the P table 2 when the CU 3 receives a response of a response of a status information response including the game ball addition result = NG from the P table 2 even if the command for requesting the state information is retransmitted twice As a result, the communication with the P platform 2 is stopped. Specifically, the CU 3 transmits a communication end request command to the P platform 2. The P platform 2 that has received the communication end request command returns a response to the communication end response to the CU 3.

  Next, the abnormal sequence will be described with reference to FIG. In particular, processing when resending the game ball addition result at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and saving ball payout will be described.

  In FIG. 69, the initial number of game balls is “50”. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and a game ball addition request = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1 and the number of game balls = 50 to the CU3.

  Thereafter, the player presses the possession payout button. Therefore, CU3 confirms the consumption of holding balls / storing balls, sends a command of status information request including serial number = n + 2, gaming ball addition request = ON, number of adding balls = 125 balls to P stand 2,・ Notify the information that converted the stored ball into a game ball. At that time, CU3 backs up the data of serial number = n + 2, number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of added balls) = 175. The P table 2 receives the command and updates the data so that the number of game balls = 50 (the number of game balls before update) +125 (the number of additional balls) = 175.

  After that, the P stand 2 receives the CU3 status information request command, and receives a status information response including serial number = n + 3, number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before game ball addition), game ball addition result = OK. A response is returned to CU3. However, the response does not reach CU3 due to a communication failure from P platform 2 to CU3.

  Since the CU 3 has not received a response for 200 ms after transmitting the status information request command of serial number = n + 2, it transmits the same command to the P unit 2 again. Since CU3 is a retransmission of the status information request command, it does not update the serial number and retransmits the status information request command with the serial number = n + 2. The P unit 2 determines that the command transmitted from the CU 3 is the same command number = n + 2 and thus is a retransmitted command, and does not update the game ball number data.

  In response to the CU3 status information request command, the P table 2 sends a response of a status information response including serial number = n + 3, number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before game ball addition), game ball addition result = OK. Reply to CU3 again. When the response is retransmitted to CU3, the communication failure from P platform 2 to CU3 is resolved, and the retransmitted response reaches CU3.

  The CU 3 that has received the response of the status information response including the game ball addition result = OK transmits a status information request command including the serial number = n + 4 and the game ball addition request = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to the status information request command transmitted by CU3, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 5 and the number of game balls = 175 to the CU3.

  Next, an abnormal sequence will be described with reference to FIG. In particular, a process when the status information response from the P platform 2 has not reached the CU 3 will be described.

  FIG. 70 shows a sequence for retransmitting an unreachable state information response. In particular, FIG. 70 shows a case where the game table information (the number of game balls, etc.) has changed due to a game between the transmission of the status information response that has not been reached and the retransmission of the information.

  Referring to FIG. 70, the status information response of serial number = n + 1 includes information of the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23. This status information response does not reach the CU, and a command instructing retransmission of the status information request is transmitted from the CU side. However, during that time, the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls change due to the launch of balls or the occurrence of winnings, and the number of game balls also changes accordingly. Then, the P units do not retransmit the state information response transmitted earlier, but retransmit a new state information response taking into account the change in the gaming table information from the previous transmission to the current time. As a result, in FIG. 70, the status information response at the time of retransmission includes information on the number of game balls = 450, the number of added balls = 6, and the number of subtracted balls = 26. The CU updates the number of game balls based on the retransmitted state information response.

  In this way, when the game machine information is changed at the time of retransmission of the information information response, the P machine further retransmits the previous status information response as it is, and further sends a status information response corresponding to the change in the game machine information. Instead of transmitting, one information information response including the change in the game machine information is retransmitted. For this reason, it is possible to reliably transmit the change of the game table information to the CU while improving the communication efficiency.

  Hereinafter, the sequence will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In FIG. 70, the initial number of game balls is “500”. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23 to the CU 3. However, the response does not reach CU3 due to a communication failure from P platform 2 to CU3.

  Since the CU 3 has not received a response for 200 ms after transmitting the status information request command with the serial number = n, it transmits the same command to the P unit 2 again. Since CU3 is a retransmission of the status information request command, it does not update the serial number and retransmits the status information request command with the serial number = n.

  The P table 2 has a game table information of 450 balls, which is added by game played after returning a response to the previously transmitted command and returning a response to the retransmitted command. The number of balls was 6 and the number of subtraction balls was 36. Therefore, when the response to the command that has been retransmitted is retransmitted, the P platform 2 also transmits the amount of change in game balls since the previous transmission. Specifically, the P stand 2 returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 450, the number of added balls = 6, and the number of subtracted balls = 26 to the CU3.

  Thereafter, CU3 backs up the data of serial number = n + 1 and the number of game balls = 450 (480 + 6-36).

  As described above, in the abnormal system sequence described above, the data on the CU side is corrected by the recovery process.

  In particular, as in the case of FIG. 57, when the last transmission sequence number (P sequence number) transmitted from the P units at the time of recovery is the same value as the sequence number (CU sequence number) stored on the CU side. Includes the previous game machine information included in the detailed recovery response and the current game machine information, and only the previous game machine information (the latest game machine information) is used for recovery and stored on the CU side. The number of game balls etc. that are present is corrected to an appropriate value.

  Further, as in the case of FIG. 58, the recovery is performed even when the serial number (CU serial number) stored on the CU side is larger than the last transmission serial number (P base serial number) transmitted from the P base at the time of recovery. Of the previous game machine information and the current game machine information included in the detailed response, only the previous game machine information (latest game machine information) is used for recovery on the CU side and the number of game balls stored on the CU side. Etc. are corrected to appropriate values.

  On the other hand, as in the case of FIG. 59, when the final transmission sequence number (P sequence number) transmitted from the P units at the time of recovery is greater than the sequence number (CU sequence number) stored on the CU side. Is the number of game balls etc. that are recovered on the CU side and stored on the CU side using both the previous gaming machine information and the current gaming machine information (latest gaming machine information) included in the recovery detailed response. Corrected to an appropriate value.

  Thus, at the time of recovery, the CU discriminates the relationship between the CU sequence number and the P base sequence number, and the data on the CU side is corrected to an appropriate value. As a result, when the communication between the CU and the P unit is resumed, the communication proceeds while the data that should have been transmitted on the P unit side at the end of the previous communication is not received on the CU side. Can be solved.

  In the abnormal sequence described above, the P units receive a recovery detail request, return a recovery detail response to the CU, and transmit recovery data by the recovery detail response (see FIG. 33). However, instead of this, a system configuration that performs the above-described recovery processing without using a recovery detailed response message may be used. For example, when a recovery detail request is received from a CU, the P platform does not send recovery data with a special message called a recovery detail response, but returns data necessary for recovery as a normal status information response. May be.

  Next, a further abnormal system sequence will be described with reference to FIG. In particular, a process of retransmitting a status information response command from the CU 3 to the P platform 2 will be described.

  FIG. 71 shows a sequence for retransmitting an unreachable status information request. In particular, FIG. 71 shows a case where the game table information (the number of game balls, etc.) has changed due to a game after the status information request that has not been reached is transmitted and before the information is retransmitted.

  Referring to FIG. 71, the status information request of serial number = n + 2 transmitted from the CU does not reach the P platform for some reason, and the same status information request is retransmitted from the CU after a predetermined time has elapsed. However, on the P platform side, after transmitting the status information response (serial number = n + 1) to the CU first, the gaming table information is successively changed by the game while waiting for the status information request from the CU. When the first status information request with serial number = n + 2 transmitted from the CU has arrived, the P device returns a status information response including game table information at that time, but in this example, serial number = n + 2 The first status information request has not reached P units. For this reason, the P machines cumulatively store the gaming machine information that changes while waiting for the status information request. Then, when the retransmitted status information request of serial number = n + 2 arrives, a status information response including the gaming machine information accumulated and stored at that time is returned to the CU.

  In this way, while the state in which the information for instructing transmission of the next gaming machine information cannot be received from the CU continues even after a predetermined period has elapsed since the P machine has transmitted the gaming machine information, The changing game machine information is stored cumulatively. Thereafter, the P machines transmit the accumulated game machine information at the stage where the information instructing the transmission of the game machine information has been received. For this reason, even when the communication between the CU and the P platform is temporarily interrupted, the gaming table information can be reliably collected on the CU side.

  Hereinafter, the sequence will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In FIG. 71, the initial number of game balls is “500”. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23 to the CU 3.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including the serial number = n + 2 to the P unit 2. At that time, the CU 3 backs up the data of the serial number = n + 2 and the number of game balls = 480 (500 + 3-23). However, the command does not reach the P base 2 due to a communication failure from the CU 3 to the P base 2.

  Since the CU 3 has not received a response for 200 ms after transmitting the status information request command of serial number = n + 2, it transmits the same command to the P unit 2 again. Since CU3 is a retransmission of the status information request command, it does not update the serial number and retransmits the status information request command with the serial number = n + 2.

  The P table 2 has a game table information of 450 balls, which is added by game played after returning a response to the previously transmitted command and returning a response to the retransmitted command. The number of balls was 6 and the number of subtraction balls was 36. Therefore, when the response to the retransmitted command is transmitted, the P platform 2 accumulates and transmits the number of game balls that change while waiting for the status information request command. Specifically, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 3, the number of game balls = 450, the number of added balls = 6, and the number of subtracted balls = 36 to the CU3.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 4 to the P unit 2. At that time, CU3 backs up the data of serial number = n + 4 and number of game balls = 450 (480 + 6-36).

  The recovery processing at the time of abnormality described above is summarized as follows. If there is a difference of 2 or more between the serial numbers of the CU 3 and the P stand 2, recovery is not performed as all illegal. However, when the serial number of CU3 = 0, the CU3 is exchanged, and only the latest game machine information of the P machine 2 is recovered, and the CU 3 takes in the latest game machine information of the P machine 2. Further, recovery is not performed when the serial number of the P platform 2 is 0.

  In the case of “the serial number from the P stand 2 ≦ the storage serial number of CU3”, the recovery is performed only with the latest gaming machine information.

  In the case of “serial number from P table 2> stored serial number of CU3”, recovery is performed using the latest gaming machine information and the previous gaming machine information.

  In the above, the abnormal system sequence between CU3 and P stand 2 was demonstrated using FIGS. In the explanation, the operation of the abnormal sequence after “pressing the replay button” has been described, but the same operation is performed after “pressing the coin payout button”.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the possession ball sharing process will be described. “Mobama sharing” means that the player divides and transfers the ball to another person. In FIG. 72, the number of balls specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is “0” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “1000” balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and a count response = OFF to the P unit 2.

  Thereafter, for example, when the player touches and specifies a ball sharing from a plurality of menus displayed on the display 54, for example, the ball sharing process occurs in the CU3. The number of balls used for holding ball sharing is 100 balls.

  However, as described above, since the number of possessed balls is “0”, the display control unit 350 of the CU 3 controls the display 54 to display “Please press the count button for lack of possession”. Under the control, the display unit 54 displays “Please press the counting button because of the shortage of balls”.

  The player sees the indication “Please press the count button because of the shortage of balls” on the display 54, and presses the count button 28 for a short time to convert the game ball into a ball.

  When the operation of the count button 28 is detected, the P platform 2 notifies the CU of a count request associated with the operation of the count button 28 before starting the subtraction process of the game balls for the count based on the detection. That is, a status information response of serial number = n + 1 with the count request turned ON is transmitted to the CU. As shown in the figure, at this stage, the number of game balls remains 1000, and the number of game balls included in the status information response of serial number = n + 1 does not change.

  When the CU receives the count information = ON state information response, the CU determines whether the count is possible. If the count is possible, the CU sends a status information request (in this case, serial number = n + 2) to the P units with the count response turned ON. To do.

  Then, the P units determine that counting is permitted, subtract the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the operation of the count button (here, 100 points), and the state of the number of game balls = 900 and the number of counted balls = 100 In order to notify CU3, a response of a status information response including serial number = n + 3, number of gaming balls = 900, counting ball number = 100, counting request = ON is returned to CU3.

  Upon receiving the response to the status information response, CU3 adds the counted number of balls (100 balls) to the number of balls (0 ball) and updates the number of balls to 100, and the number of balls is 1000 (pre-updated game balls) Number) -100 (count ball number) = 900 data is backed up. Further, the CU 3 receives a response of the state information response and starts display for counting 100 game balls.

  That is, by pressing the count button 28 once, 100 balls out of the number of game balls are counted and counted as counting balls. If the initial number of game balls is “1000”, the number of game balls becomes “900” and the count ball becomes “100” by pressing the count button 28 once.

  As described above, when the number of remaining balls is less than the desired number of shared points, a predetermined notification is given, so that the player performs an operation of counting the number of game balls in order to receive a desired shared point service. Can be encouraged.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 4 and a count response = ON to the P platform 2. The reason why the counting response = ON is to notify the P-unit 2 of receipt of the counting ball in response to the response of the previous status information response. In response to this, since the operation of pressing the counting button 28 has not been performed, the P table 2 responds with a status information response including serial number = n + 5, number of gaming balls = 900, number of counting balls = 0, counting request = OFF. Is returned to CU3.

  As a result of the counting operation described above, the number of balls has reached “100”, so CU3 can secure the number of balls to be used for sharing the ball and after the ball is liquidated, the ball sharing process is completed. To do. Specifically, the liquidation of this ball is a process of subtracting the ball to be shared (divided and transferred) from the current number of balls (1000 balls), and is executed by the CU control unit 323.

  By executing this ball sharing process, the visitor card in which the number of balls to be shared (divided transfer) (100 balls) is recorded is ejected from the CU3, and the player hands it over to the other party who transfers the visitor card. As a result, the coins are shared (divided and transferred).

  Next, the wagon service process will be described with reference to FIG. The wagon service is a service in which goods such as drinks are provided to the player by consuming the ball. A player who desires a wagon service touches the display 54 to place a wagon order. Then, the order content ordered by the player is input as an infrared signal from the IR photosensitive unit 320 of the CU 3 to the remote controller owned by the store clerk. In place of or in addition to the order input by the remote controller, the wagon service order operation by the player is collected using a LAN (Local Area Network) or the like, and the wagon service is performed according to the collected order contents. You may do it.

  The amusement hall clerk performs a wagon service according to the contents of the order entered on the remote control. In FIG. 73, the number of possessed balls specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is “30” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “60” balls.

  First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and a count response = OFF to the P unit 2.

  Thereafter, the player performs a wagon order by performing a touch operation as described above, so that processing of the wagon order occurs in CU3. The number of balls used for the wagon order is 70 balls.

  However, as described above, since the number of possessed balls is “30”, the display control unit 350 of the CU 3 controls the display 54 to display “Please press the count button for lack of balls”. Under the control, the display unit 54 displays “Please press the counting button because of the shortage of balls”. It should be noted that the display unit 54 performs the “displaying” period shown in FIG. 73, for example, the display shown in FIG.

  In this way, when the remaining possession ball is less than the desired wagon service product amount, a predetermined notification is made, and the player is prompted to count the game balls to receive the desired wagon service. Can do.

  The player sees the indication “Please press the count button because of the shortage of balls” on the display 54, and presses the count button 28 for a short time to convert the game ball into a ball. When the count button 28 is pressed once, if there are 100 or more game balls, 100 balls are counted and counted as counting balls. For example, if the number of game balls is “160”, the counting operation counts the number of balls as “100” and the number of game balls becomes “60”. However, in this example, since the initial number of game balls is “60” balls, even if the count button 28 is pressed once, only 60 balls are counted, and the number of game balls is “0” balls, “60” balls. In this example, since it is assumed that the ball is not continuously fired when the counting button 28 is operated, the counting operation is not invalidated even if the number of game balls is less than 250.

  When the operation of the count button 28 is detected, the P platform 2 notifies the CU of a count request associated with the operation of the count button 28 before starting the subtraction process of the game balls for the count based on the detection. That is, a status information response of serial number = n + 1 with the count request turned ON is transmitted to the CU. As shown in the figure, at this stage, the number of game balls remains 60, and the number of game balls included in the state information response of serial number = n + 1 does not change.

  When the CU receives the count information = ON state information response, the CU determines whether the count is possible. If the count is possible, the CU sends a status information request (in this case, serial number = n + 2) to the P units with the count response turned ON. To do.

  Then, the P units determine that the counting is permitted, subtract the total number of game balls (60 points) remaining, and notify the CU 3 of the state of the number of game balls = 0 and the number of count balls = 60. A response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 3, the number of gaming balls = 0, the counting ball number = 60, and the counting request = ON is returned to the CU3. In response to the response of the state information response, CU3 adds the number of balls (60 balls) to the number of balls (30 balls) and updates the number of balls to 90, and the number of game balls = 60 (game balls before update) Number) −60 (the number of balls counted) = 0. Further, the CU 3 receives the response of the state information response and starts display for counting 60 game balls.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 4 and a count response = ON to the P platform 2. The reason why the counting response = ON is to notify the P-unit 2 of receipt of the counting ball in response to the response of the previous status information response. In response to this, since the operation of depressing the counting button 28 is not performed, the P table 2 responds with a status information response including serial number = n + 5, number of gaming balls = 0, number of counting balls = 0, counting request = OFF. Is returned to CU3.

  As a result of the counting operation described above, the number of held balls has become “90” balls, so CU3 can secure “70” balls for the number of wagons to be used, and pay the number of held balls (to the wagon order). After subtracting 70 balls, the wagon order processing is completed. Specifically, the liquidation of this ball is a process of subtracting the ball (70 balls) used for the wagon service from the current number of balls (90 balls), and is executed by the CU control unit 323. The payment when this wagon service is performed is, for example, in the same way as with the above-mentioned share of the ball, the ball used for the wagon service (70 balls) is written on the visitor card and discharged, and the visitor card is handed over to pay. Make a payment. As another method, a method may be used in which a terminal possessed by a staff member who performs a wagon service and the CU 3 communicate with each other to move a ball (70 balls) used for the wagon service to the terminal possessed by the staff member. Furthermore, the staff member who performs the wagon service may perform some operation on the CU 3 at the time when the order item is delivered, and subtract the holding balls (70 balls) used for the wagon service based on the operation.

  Note that the CU or P stand may perform service notification control for notifying a service that can be received by the player using a holding ball such as a wagon service. In this case, when the player's possession ball is less than the score necessary for the service, the game point remains, and even if the game ball reaches the score necessary for the service by adding the game ball, It is good also as what does not alert | report the service which a person can receive.

  For example, the service notification control may be performed using a display screen by the display unit 54. More specifically, a display item (icon) of “Wagon Service” is displayed at a predetermined position on the screen, and when the player touches this, a message “Please select the type to order” is displayed. As the wagon menu, a plurality of types of menus such as “standard menu”, “drinks”, “foods”, “sweets” and the like are displayed. Further, the current number of possessed balls and the number of game balls are displayed on the screen.

  Further, when the player selects and operates one of the menus from “standard menu”, “drinks”, “foods”, and “sweets”, the corresponding product screen is displayed. For example, when the player selects “Drinks”, a message “Please select a product to order” and a plurality of products included in the drink are displayed. Each product also displays the number of balls needed when placing an order.

  However, a product that can be purchased within the range of the possession is displayed with a solid line to notify that the service can be purchased within the range of the possession. On the other hand, as a service that a player can receive by converting a game ball into a current ball with a counting button and displaying a product that can be purchased by adding the converted ball in a dotted line No notification (not shown with solid line). In addition, a product that cannot be purchased even if the game ball is converted into a possession ball is displayed with “x” on the product name.

  As a result, if the player touches the product displayed with a solid line, the ball is subtracted and the product providing service can be received. Further, if the player touches a product displayed in a broken line, a notification is made to prompt the player to count game balls. In addition, if the player touches the product indicated by ×, a notification that there is a shortage of holding balls and game balls is made.

  The display method is not limited to this, and a menu that can be purchased only with a ball, a menu that can be purchased with the number of balls including a ball and a game ball, and the number of balls including a ball and a game ball. However, any display that can distinguish menus that cannot be purchased may be used. For example, a menu that can be purchased with only balls is displayed brightly with a lamp, etc., and a menu that can be purchased with the number of balls that include balls and game balls is flashed and displayed. For menus that cannot be purchased even with the number of balls and game balls, it is possible to make the selection impossible without turning on the lamp or the like. Moreover, you may control so that the menu which cannot be purchased even with the number of balls which added the holding ball and the game ball is not displayed. Furthermore, in the case of the number of balls that cannot be purchased only with possession balls but with game balls added to the possession balls, the menu that can be purchased is displayed in a framework with a broken line. It may be displayed with a mark, or it may be controlled not to display such a menu.

<Combination of game system configurations>
As shown in FIG. 5, the game system described above is provided with the counting button 28 on the P base 2, and the holding balls are not managed by the P base 2, but are managed by the CU 3. On the other hand, the management of the gaming balls is mainly performed. P display 2 is performed, displays 54 and 312 are provided on P table 2 and CU3, display control unit 350 is provided only on CU3, and display control of displays 54 and 312 is performed on the CU3 side. However, the gaming system according to the present invention is not limited to the above-described configuration. For example, as another game system configuration, the counting button 28 is provided on the P base 2, the management of the game balls and holding balls is not performed on the P base 2, but on the CU 3, and the display is provided on the P base 2 and the CU 3. The display control unit 350 may be provided only on the P base 2 and display control of the display may be performed on the P base 2 side. Many other combinations of gaming system configurations exist. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a combination example of the configuration of such a gaming system.

  The configuration of the gaming system shown in FIG. 8, and the configuration of another gaming system described above is the combination No. 1 shown in FIG. 2. In FIG. 74, 63 combinations of game system configurations are described. However, no. 23 to No. No. 41, no. 44 to No. Combinations up to 62 are no. 2 to No. Since the column of the counting buttons of up to 20 combinations can be replaced with CU and P units, the description is omitted.

  It should be noted that the significance of whether the ball management (management of the ball and management of the game ball) is performed by the CU or the P platform is, in part, the storage of the ball data. . For example, in the case of a gaming system in which the holding balls are stored only by the CU and the gaming balls are stored only by the P units, the management of the holding balls is the CU and the management of the gaming balls is the P unit.

  Alternatively, the significance of whether the ball management (management of the ball, management of the game ball) is performed by the CU or the P stand is that the ball data is stored in both the CU and the P stand, When there is a difference between the two data, which data is used to correct the data. For example, in the case of the gaming system shown in FIG. 12, the game balls are stored in both the CU and the P units, but if there is a difference between the two data, the game is based on the data on the P unit side. Correct the ball. In this case, the management of game balls is P units.

  In FIG. 74, all possible combinations are listed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and unnecessary combinations may be deleted according to the technical idea disclosed in the present embodiment. For example, in the case where it is a technical idea that the CU 3 needs to display and control the game balls, the “display control” field is limited to “CU” only.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the content of the holding ball and the game ball are made different from each other, but they may be made into one common value data without being distinguished from each other. For example, common value data is specified by the card itself, the common value data is withdrawn and transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2, and the P unit 2 that receives it stores it as common value data, and the progress of the game The common value data may be updated according to the control, and the finally updated common value data may be recorded on the card and discharged at the end of the game. The “common value data”, “mochitama”, and “game ball” are collectively referred to as “score”.

<Example of processing of game system>
Next, FIG. 75 is a flowchart for explaining processing of the gaming system when there are a predetermined number or more of game balls. With reference to FIG. 75, the process of the payout control unit 171 when the number of game balls is a predetermined number or more and the process of the CU control unit 323 when the number of game balls is a predetermined number or more will be described.

  In the process when the number of game balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, first, the payout control unit 171 checks the current number of game balls of the P unit 2 (step S481). Specifically, the payout control unit 171 reads the current number of game balls stored in the RAM mounted on the P-side payout control board 17.

  Next, the payout control unit 171 determines whether or not a big hit has occurred during the game (step S482). When a big hit occurs during a game, the number of game balls tends to exceed a predetermined number, and the player may feel inconvenience if the counting operation is prompted each time or the game ball is stopped firing. Conceivable. Therefore, when the payout control unit 171 determines that a big hit has occurred in the game (step S482: YES), the payout control unit 171 ends without performing the subsequent processing (return).

  If the payout control unit 171 determines that a big hit has not occurred during the game (step S482: NO), the payout control unit 171 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have been confirmed is greater than the 3000 full standard value ( Step S483). If the payout control unit 171 determines that there are more than 3000 confirmed game balls (step S483: YES), the payout control unit 171 transmits the game ball excess information to the CU control unit 323 (step S484). When the payout control unit 171 determines that the confirmed game balls are 3000 balls or less (step S483: NO), the payout control unit 171 ends without performing the subsequent processing (return).

  When the CU control unit 323 receives the game ball excess information from the payout control unit 171 (step S488), the display unit 54 displays “The game ball is full. Please perform the count operation.” Is displayed (step S489).

  When the game balls are full in this way, the display of the game effect which has been performed on the display device 54 by the display control of the effect control unit 151 is switched to the display of game information such as the number of game balls. You may do it. In that case, the display control of the display 54 may be performed by the display control unit 350 on the CU3 side, or may be performed by the effect control unit 151. When the effect control unit 151 performs, the payout control unit 171 and the effect control unit 151 are communicably connected, and game information (full tank information) necessary for display is transmitted from the payout control unit 171 to the effect control unit 151. What should I do? Alternatively, game information (full tank information) necessary for display may be transmitted from the main control unit 161 to the effect control unit 151.

  Further, when the game balls are full, the game ball number display 29 may be displayed in an identifiable manner instead of the display device 54 or in addition to the display device 54. For example, the number of balls may be displayed blinking on the game ball number display 29. Alternatively, when the game ball number display 29 is constituted by an image display, it may be displayed that “the game balls are full. Please perform the counting operation.”

  In this way, if the number of game balls is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, predetermined notification control is performed, and this makes it possible to simulate a system similar to the conventional game system that notifies when the ball is full on the plate. It is possible to provide a system that can be reproduced and is familiar to players who are accustomed to the conventional game system.

  In addition, when using data game balls instead of actual game balls as in this system, there is no inconvenience of being overwhelmed with a large amount of balls, so there is no upper limit on the number of game balls. You may do it. However, if no upper limit is set, the player and the game store when the game ball data is lost due to troubles in the P units when the player has acquired a very large number of game balls. The problem between and becomes greater. Therefore, as in this embodiment, an upper limit value is provided for the number of game balls in the form of a full tank, and when the number of game balls reaches the upper limit value, counting is promoted and converted into points, P units It is possible to prevent the amusement store's compensation amount from becoming too large in the event that trouble occurs and the game ball data is lost. In other words, by converting the number of game balls into the number of points according to the counting operation and storing it in the CU3, it is possible to store the converted number of points in the hall server via the CU3. Even if a trouble occurs, it is easy to ensure compensation to the player by the number of points stored in the hall server.

  The payout control unit 171 determines whether or not the player has pressed the count button 28 within 10 seconds after performing the display for prompting the count operation (step S485). If the payout control unit 171 determines that the player has pressed the count button 28 within 10 seconds after the display for prompting the count operation (step S485: YES), the payout control unit 171 ends without performing the subsequent processing. (return). It should be noted that when the notification such as a display prompting the counting operation is terminated, for example, when the counting button 28 is depressed, the full tank state is indicated. When the problem is solved, a predetermined fixed period of time has passed, or a combination of these may be used. When the counting button 28 is pushed down, the determination is made by the P stand 2 when the full state is eliminated, and the determination is made by the CU 3 when a predetermined fixed period has elapsed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and all the determinations may be made on either the CU3 side or the P stand 2 side.

  If the payout control unit 171 determines that the player has not pressed the count button 28 within 10 seconds after the display for prompting the count operation (step S485: NO), the game control unit 171 stops the play of the game ball. That is, the payout control unit 171 stops the launching of the game ball by stopping the firing motor 18 via the firing control board 31 because the player does not perform the counting operation even after 10 seconds have passed since the counting operation is prompted. In this way, if the number of game balls is equal to or greater than a predetermined number and the counting operation is not performed, the game is disabled and the player can be prompted to perform the counting operation.

  The payout control unit 171 transmits to the CU control unit 323 that the game ball has been stopped because the counting operation is not performed even after 10 seconds have elapsed since the prompting of the counting operation, as the stop shooting information when the game ball is exceeded (Step 321). S487). Thereafter, the payout control unit 171 ends the processing (return).

  When the CU control unit 323 receives from the payout control unit 171 the launch stop information when the game ball is exceeded (step S490), the display 54 displays “The game ball is full. ”Is displayed indicating that the launch has been stopped due to an excess of game balls (step S491). Thereafter, the payout control unit 171 ends the processing (return).

  As described above, the gaming system prompts the player to perform a counting operation when the number of game balls exceeds a predetermined number, so that a system similar to the conventional system that notifies when the game medium is full is simulated. A system that can be reproduced and that is familiar to players who are accustomed to conventional gaming systems can be provided.

  Next, FIG. 76 is a flowchart for explaining the operation processing of the counting button. Referring to FIG. 76, in step S691, when the player (user) presses down counting button 28 in FIG. 1, the operation process of counting button 28 is started.

  In step S692, it is determined whether or not the lending process from the possession ball to the game ball (the operation process for the replay button 319) is being executed. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the lending process by the replay button 319 for converting from the holding ball to the game ball in step S692 from competing with the counting process which is a process opposite to the lending process.

  If it is determined in step S692 that the lending process from the possession ball to the game ball is being executed, the process proceeds to step S698. In step S697, since the operation by the replay button 319 and the counting operation are in conflict, the operation of depressing the counting button is invalidated, and the process ends (return). When the operation of depressing the count button 28 is invalidated, the display 54, 312 or the like displays a message that “the count button operation is invalidated because the ball lending process from holding balls / storage balls is in progress”. You may do it.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S692 that the lending process from the holding ball to the game ball is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S693. Next, in step S693, it is determined whether or not a game is in progress at the time this process is being performed.

  If it is determined in step S693 that the game is in progress, the process proceeds to step S694, and it is further determined whether or not the minimum required number of game balls in the game is 250 balls or more. Here, the minimum required number of game balls is described as 250 balls, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the minimum required number of game balls can be arbitrarily set.

  If it is determined in step S694 that the current number of game balls is 250 balls or more, the process proceeds to step S695. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current number of game balls is less than 250 balls, the process proceeds to step S698. The processing in step S694 is provided because it is desirable in the system to secure the minimum required number of balls for managing the number of balls in the game.

  In addition, a step of determining “whether a membership card is used and a game is being played” is added between steps S694 and S695, and when it is determined that a game is being played using the membership card. Even if the number of game balls in the game is 250 balls or less, as long as there are game balls, counting may be permitted and the process may proceed to step S695. In the case of a visitor card, if the number of game balls becomes very small, the player may throw away the visitor card, and it is necessary to prevent such a situation. This is because the personal information is specified by the card ID, so that such a situation does not occur.

  Step S695 shows counting control in the case of a long press, but shows another example different from the control of FIG. 49 described above. In step S695, the number of game balls (number of processed balls) to be counted per second from the current number of game balls is determined. For example, if the current number of game balls is 10000 balls or more, the number of processed balls is 2500 balls. If the current number of game balls is 5000 or more and less than 10000 balls, the number of processed balls is 2000 balls. If the number of game balls is 1000 balls or more and less than 5000 balls, the number of processed balls is 1000 balls. If the current number of game balls is 200 balls or more and less than 1000 balls, the number of processed balls is 200 balls. If the number of game balls is less than 200 balls, the number of game balls is set as the current number of game balls, and the process proceeds to step S696.

  In step S696, counting processing from game balls to holding balls is executed according to the set number of processing balls. For example, if the current number of game balls is 15000 balls, wait until 1 second has elapsed after counting 2500 balls, and repeat the operation of counting 2500 balls when 1 second has elapsed. Repeating 6 times completes counting all balls over 5 seconds. Next, the process proceeds to step S697.

  In step S697, the control for displaying the counting operation over a plurality of times in step S696 at any time on the display unit 54 is executed in step S697 (return). If the current number of game balls is 15000 balls, wait until 1 second has elapsed after counting 2500 balls, and when 1 second has elapsed, the operation of counting 2500 balls is repeated 6 times to take 5 seconds. The state where the counting of all the balls is completed is displayed on the display 54.

  Following the processing in steps S692 and S694, in step S698, the operation of depressing the counting button is invalidated, and the processing ends (return). In step S698, the ball lending process, which is the reverse of the counting process, or the invalidation of the counting process request for the number of game balls that is less than the minimum required number of game balls that is inappropriate for the management of the number of balls being played Is provided.

  According to the above configuration, the number of counting balls counted in one counting operation differs depending on the number of gaming balls acquired by the player, so even if there are relatively many gaming balls The number of counting operations required to count all the game balls is not extremely increased, and the operability of the counting button can be improved thereby.

  FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a modification of the display of the counting operation. In the above embodiment, the number of balls to be counted for the game ball is determined by the number of times and the time for which the counting button 28 is depressed. In this modification, instead of the counting button 28, a total counting button 28a and a partial counting button 28b as shown in FIG. 77 are displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the display 54.

  Referring to FIG. 77, a total counting button 28a and a partial counting button 28b are displayed on the left half of the screen. The all-counting button 28a is a button for performing all-counting processing for converting all of the number of game balls into a possessed ball when pressed once, and does not require a long press operation. On the other hand, the partial counting button 28b is a button for performing a partial counting process for converting a part of the number of game balls into a holding ball. For example, the partial counting button 28b is used when sharing a ball or using a wagon service.

  On the other hand, a numeric keypad 28c is displayed on the right half of the screen, and the numeric keypad 28c includes 0-9 numeric keys, a clear key (C), and an equal key (=). In this example, the number key, the clear key, and the equal key are used. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and keys for providing various functions can be arranged.

  The player uses the numeric keypad 28c to input the number of game balls to be counted and inputs an equal key. Thereby, the number of game balls to be counted is determined. Thereafter, by pressing the partial counting button 28b, the desired number of game balls can be converted into a possession ball. Here, the operation has been described with the operation of pressing the partial counting button 28b after inputting and confirming the game ball to be counted first using the numeric keypad 28c, but not limited thereto, after pressing the partial counting button 28b, After inputting the number of game balls to be counted, an equal key is input to start the counting process.

  If the number of game balls to be counted is erroneously input, the desired number of game balls to be converted can be input again after inputting the clear key.

  The number of game balls that have been input is displayed on the display portion at the top of the numeric keypad 28c. By confirming this display portion, the player can confirm whether or not the requested number of game balls is being input.

  In the case of adopting such a modified example, all counting operations and partial counting operations of game balls are possible, so that it is possible to count a part of balls with each counter It is possible to provide a new system using game ball data in a form close to that of the game system.

  Since the display unit 54 is controlled by the CU 3 side (see FIG. 5), a touch operation signal on the touch panel of the display unit 54 is input to the CU 3 side without passing through the P stand 2. Therefore, when the modified example shown in FIG. 77 is adopted, it is necessary to transmit the touch operation signal of the touch panel input to the CU 3 from the CU 3 to the payout control unit 171 on the P platform side. Such a touch operation signal may be included in the status information request, for example. Further, the display as shown in FIG. 77 may be performed on the CU side display 312. Similarly in this case, it is necessary to transmit the touch operation signal of the touch panel input to the CU 3 from the CU 3 to the payout control unit 171 on the P platform side. In addition to the display unit 54 and the display unit 312, a dedicated display unit with a dedicated touch panel is provided, and the dedicated display unit for counting is controlled by controlling the dedicated display unit on the P table 2 side. The display as shown in 77 may be performed, and the touch operation signal may be directly input to the P base 2. Further, a screen as shown in FIG. 77 may be displayed on both the CU-side display 312 and the P-side display 54 according to the player's selection. Furthermore, the counting operation button may be displayed on the screen as described above while leaving the counting button 28 shown in FIG. 1, or when this modification is adopted, the counting button shown in FIG. 28 may be deleted.

<Slot machine>
Next, a slot machine will be described as another example of the gaming machine. FIG. 78 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front door of the slot machine is opened. In the description so far, the slot machine is also abbreviated as “S” in the following, because the pachinko machine is abbreviated as “P”.

  The above gaming system using game balls and holding balls is also applied to the S units. However, in the S platform, the game is played without using balls, and hence the game balls will be referred to as game points and the holding balls as points.

  Referring to FIG. 78, in the slot machine 2S, the front door 2bS is provided to the main body frame 2aS so that the front door 2bS can be opened and closed with the left side edge as a swing center. Although not shown in FIG. 78, a CU is connected to the left side of the slot machine 2S in the same manner as the P units.

  In the slot machine 2S, the number of bets is set by using game points, and the game points are added and updated in accordance with winning. For this reason, when playing a game in the slot machine 2S, a medal insertion operation is not necessary. Therefore, the slot machine 2S is not provided with a medal slot and a medal payout slot.

  Inside the casing of the slot machine 2S, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are juxtaposed in a horizontal direction. Of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, three consecutive symbols are arranged so as to be seen from the see-through window 10 provided on the front door 2bS. A plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a predetermined order on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

  A touch panel display 510 is provided in a portion surrounding each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 2bS. The display 510 is a display corresponding to the P displays 54, and displays various types of information (game points, points, etc.) of the same type as the display 54, as well as the number of bets set in the game. Is displayed. The display unit 510 is connected to the CU display control unit 350 in the same manner as the display unit 54 in FIG. 5 and is controlled on the CU side. The indicator 510 is not provided in a portion surrounding each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, but is provided at a lower panel portion (at a position below the start switch 7S shown in FIG. You may provide in the panel part provided with the conventional S medal payout opening.

  Further, the front door 2bS has a single BET switch 5S that is operated when setting the number of bets using “game points = 1” corresponding to one medal, and the maximum determined according to the game state. When setting the number of bets (for example, “game point = 3” in the normal game state before BB occurrence and RT (Replay Time) where the winning probability of replay is high, “game point = 2” in the bonus) The MAXBET switch 6S is operated, the start switch 7S is operated when the game is started, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are respectively operated when the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped. Yes.

  When playing a game in the slot machine 2S, first, as with the P machines, after securing a game point using the adjacent CU, the number of bets is set using the game point. The game points can be obtained by withdrawing the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted into the CU, points, or a stored medal (corresponding to P stored balls) deposited in the game hall. In order to use the game points, the single BET switch 5S or the MAXBET switch 6S may be operated. In the present embodiment, for example, by setting the number of bets to 1, the game points are deducted by 1, and the display of the game points on the display 510 is also subtracted and updated. When the bet number is set, the pay line determined according to the bet number and the gaming state is valid, and the operation of the start switch 7S is valid, that is, the game can be started.

  When the start switch 7S is operated while the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously change. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 10.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) on the activated pay line is displayed on each reel 2L, 2C, When the 2R display result is stopped, a prize is generated, a game point determined according to the prize is given to the player, and the display of the game point on the display 510 is also added and updated.

  In the case of S units, it is possible to count game points as in the case of P units. As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 2S is provided with a counting button 28S for counting game points and converting them into points. The ball lending button, the return button, and the replay button are provided on the CU side (see FIG. 5). The player executes the counting operation based on an arbitrary timing or a display for prompting the counting operation on the display unit 510 in the same manner as the P units. Then, the game points are counted and the display 510 displays a state in which the points are increased while the game points are decreased. The ball lending button may be provided not on the CU side but on the P platform side and the S platform side. In that case, the operation signal of the ball lending button may be directly input to the CU 3 or may be transmitted to the CU 3 as a status information response via the P unit 2 or the S unit (slot machine) 2S. It may be.

  The types of winning combinations are determined according to the state of the game, but can be broadly divided into special roles with a shift to the big bonus (BB) and regular bonus (RB), and small roles with payout of medals. And a re-gamer (replay) that allows the next game to be started without the need to set the bet amount.

  Which of a plurality of types of winning combinations is to be won or whether any winning combination is to be excluded is determined by, for example, the main control unit (S) controlling the slot machine 2S when a start operation is detected. It corresponds to the main control unit 161 of the stand). This determination is made, for example, by drawing a random number generated from a predetermined random number generator or generated on software.

  After that, the main control unit waits for the reel stop operation by the player, draws in the symbol corresponding to the winning combination in the predetermined frame number range based on the stop operation time, otherwise draws another symbol Is controlled to stop the three symbols and determine whether or not there is a prize. If the main control base determines that a winning is made, the main control base gives the player game points according to the type of winning (adds game points).

  In other words, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value by using the S units, and a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified can be displayed in a variable manner. A slot machine in which one game is completed when a display result is derived to the variable display device, and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device, which is displayed on the variable display device Before the result is derived, a predetermining unit that determines whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings to be generated, and causing the variable display device to derive a display result according to the determination result of the predetermining unit A slot machine including derivation control means for performing control and giving means for giving a game value when the winning occurs is configured.

  FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various data stored in each of the card unit and the slot machine and its transmission / reception mode. This FIG. 79 is obtained by replacing the term of FIG. 12 described as the configuration of the P units with that for the S units, and the mode is the same as that described with reference to FIG. The description of is omitted.

<Modifications and feature points>
Next, modifications and feature points of the present embodiment described above are listed.

  (1) When a slot machine (S units), which is an example of a gaming machine, is applied to the above gaming system, for example, there are P units of reels and various sensor parts attached to the reels and a main control board for controlling the reels. Corresponding to the board, other configurations correspond to P game frames. However, the S units do not require the various detection switches 41a, 701, 33, the launch control board 31, and the launch motor 18 of the game frame shown in FIG.

  A conventional S unit is provided with a credit function. When this function is enabled, the credit is subtracted when the number of bets is set, and the credit is added when a winning occurs. However, there is an upper limit for credits, and when a winning occurs when the number of credits reaches the upper limit value, medals are paid out from the hopper.

  On the other hand, in the S units according to the present embodiment, game points are subtracted when the bet number is set, and game points are added when a winning occurs. Further, when the game points reach a predetermined number, a display for prompting a counting operation is made, and the gaming points are converted into points by performing the counting operation. For this reason, it is not necessary to pay out medals when the credit reaches the upper limit unlike the conventional S units. As a result, it is not necessary to provide a hopper on the S platform according to the present embodiment.

  As a result, the amusement hall does not need to secure a large number of medals, reducing the economic burden. The game arcade is also freed from operations such as replenishment / collection of medals and maintenance operations to deal with clogged medals. The player is relieved from the hassle of inserting medals for each betting operation after the credit is full, and can easily concentrate on the game.

  On the other hand, if S units become medalless, a player who has won a large number of medals will not be able to act to show off his arms by stacking boxes with medals beside the seat. Inconvenience arises. However, in this embodiment, since the function of displaying the dollar box is provided as described above, it is possible to prevent such inconvenience. In addition, it is desirable for the dollar box display in the case of S units to have a large number of medals loaded instead of a large number of balls.

  When S machines are applied as a gaming machine, each type of data is expressed as follows using two types of data, “Points” and “Game Points”, and “Credit” and “Credit Excess Points”. It is also possible to configure a gaming system that is converted. Note that these four types of data are displayed on the S displays 510.

  First, when a conversion operation (lending operation, saving medal payout operation, point payout operation) from the remaining amount of a prepaid card, a saving medal, or a point is detected, each is withdrawn and converted into a game point. The

  A game point is data corresponding to a medal in a conventional slot machine. For this reason, for example, it is desirable to display the number of game points on the display 510 and to display the number of medal images corresponding to the game points. For example, when a pseudo-insertion medal operation (for example, an operation of pushing a medal) such that a player touches the medal image and inserts it into the slot machine is detected, the medal image disappears and the game points are subtracted. Instead, one bet is set. By performing such a pseudo medal insertion operation three times, the bet number is set to the maximum value of three.

  Thereafter, when a pseudo medal insertion operation is further detected, a credit is added in accordance with the detection. An upper limit value (for example, 50) is set for the credit, and when the credit exceeds the upper limit value, a credit excess point is added.

  The betting amount setting can be performed using the game points as described above, and can also be performed using credits. That is, if the one-sheet BET switch 5S is operated, 1 is added to the betting number setting value and 1 is subtracted from the credit. If the MAXBET switch 6S is operated, the bet number is set to 3, and the credit is subtracted according to the bet number setting.

  As a result of the game, when a winning occurs, a number of points corresponding to the winning is added to the credit. When a winning that exceeds the upper limit of credit occurs, the score for the excess is stored as a credit excess point. This credit excess point corresponds to a medal to be paid out when a winning occurs exceeding the upper limit of credit in the conventional slot machine. For this reason, for example, it is desirable to display the credit excess points on the display 510 and to display the number of medal images corresponding to the credit excess points. Further, it is desirable to change the color of this medal image so that it can be distinguished from the medal image corresponding to the game point.

  Further, it is desirable that the credit excess points are converted into game points by the player's operation. For example, when a pseudo medal conversion operation (for example, an operation of pushing a medal) is performed such that the player touches the medal image corresponding to the credit excess point and converts it to a game point, the medal image disappears and the credit excess Points are subtracted and game points are added.

  Alternatively, if the credit becomes less than the upper limit value, the credit excess point may be automatically converted into credit.

  When the player performs a counting operation, each of the game points, credits, and credit excess points is counted and converted into points. As a result, the player's points are posted as “card possession number + game points + credits + credit excess points”. The “card possession number” is the number of points before conversion (the number of possessions currently owned by the player) that has not been converted into game points.

  In the above description, the four types of data of points, game points, credits, and credit excess points may be stored on both sides by exchanging data between the CU and S units. You may memorize | store only in the S stand side only by CU side. Further, the credit excess point may be a target for dollar box display.

  Moreover, although the example using a credit excess point was demonstrated in the above description, it is not necessary to use a credit excess point. In this case, when the credit limit is exceeded, it may be added to the game points.

  (2) In the present embodiment, game points are added by consuming the card count. Alternatively, game points are added by consuming stored balls (stored medals). That is, the card frequency or the stored ball is converted into game points. On the other hand, the card power and the stored balls are not converted into points (count balls, count medals). However, the card power and the stored ball may be once converted into points.

  (3) In the present embodiment, game points are converted into points by counting operation. The conversion rate in this case is 1: 1. However, the conversion rate in the case of conversion may be other than 1: 1. For example, when 100 game points are converted, 97 points obtained by subtracting three of them may be converted into points. Or you may make it convert into the number of game balls obtained by multiplying a predetermined ratio of less than 100% with respect to a point.

  (4) The recording medium for recording the holding point in an identifiable manner may use a mobile terminal such as a smartphone. In this case, the communication unit for communicating with the mobile terminal is provided in the CU, and the CU recognizes the ID stored in the mobile terminal by holding the mobile terminal over the communication unit. The game is made possible by the procedure as described. On the other hand, at the end of the game, the portable terminal is again held over the communication unit, so that the score at the end of the game is added to the player's score through the ID.

  (5) The operation means for counting game points may be provided on the CU side. In this case, the operation means may be displayed on a touch panel, or may be constituted by a physical switch.

  (6) In the present embodiment, when an uncounted game point remains when a card return operation is performed, a message prompting the counting is displayed on the P display or the CU side display. However, instead of such a configuration, when an uncounted game point remains when the card return operation is performed, the counting display is automatically started and the display on the P table or the CU side is used. It may be notified that automatic counting has started because there are still uncounted game points, or that, in addition, the card will be returned after completion of automatic counting.

  Alternatively, when an uncounted game point remains when the card return operation is performed, it is determined that there is a possibility that the player may leave the table temporarily, and the display (CU side or P stand side) You may display the message which confirms whether it is temporary leaving. Further, the display device may be constituted by a touch panel so that the player can input a response to the message. Furthermore, if the response input is the end of the game, a message prompting the counting operation is displayed. On the other hand, if the response input is temporarily away from the desk, the card may be temporarily ejected while the ID of the card is stored on the CU side, the P platform side, or both. Thereafter, when a card with the same ID is inserted, the game is resumed from the original state.

  (7) The counting time from the start of the counting operation to the completion of the counting display is based on the game points when the game points are less than the first reference value and when the game points exceed the first reference value. The increasing rate of the counting time may be reduced. As a result, while it is possible to produce an effect of counting display as if counting a real ball, it can be prevented that it takes too much time to complete counting due to an increase in game points. Further, when the game points exceed a certain reference value, all the counting times may be the same. Alternatively, the same counting time may be adopted regardless of the number of game points without providing a reference value.

  (8) During the big hit, the judgment reference value for judging that the number of game balls is full may be increased. In other words, the determination reference value for the full tank determination may be different depending on whether or not the big hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of game balls from rapidly increasing during the big hit, and making a full tank determination immediately to stop firing.

  (9) The number of game balls when a big hit occurs is memorized. During the big hit, even if the criterion value for full tank is exceeded, the increased number of game balls allowed after the big hit has occurred If it is within a value (for example, 1000 balls), it is good also as what does not determine a full tank.

  (10) As the counting operation means for counting the game balls, one that exhibits a counting function when operated a predetermined number of times twice or more may be employed. As a result, erroneous operation can be prevented. Further, in this case, one function may be used to exhibit another function different from the counting function. For example, when there is no operation for a predetermined time (for example, within 1 second) after the operation is performed once, a function to turn on a lamp for calling a store clerk is exhibited, and within 1 second from 1 operation. When the second operation is detected, it is conceivable to perform the counting function.

  (11) In the present embodiment, when the counting operation button is operated for less than a predetermined time (short-time operation), for example, the first ball count is counted, and when operated for a predetermined time or longer (long-time operation), the operation is performed. A number of balls that is larger than the first number of balls is counted according to time. For example, it is conceivable that 100 balls are counted in the short-time operation, while a predetermined number exceeding 100 balls, for example, 200 balls or 400 balls, is counted in the long-time operation. Also, the number of game points to be counted may be controlled to be different depending on the long press time of the counting operation button. For example, it is conceivable that 100 balls start to be counted by long-pressing for 1 second, and if the long-pressing continues for 5 seconds as it is, all the remaining balls are counted. Alternatively, it may be controlled such that a predetermined number is counted by one operation and all remaining balls are counted by the fifth operation.

  (12) “Predetermined processing” of “recording medium processing means for processing so that predetermined processing can be performed using the game points as the holding points when a predetermined recording medium processing operation is detected” , CU processing when using a card ejected from the CU inserted into another CU connected to another gaming machine (processing to withdraw the possessed ball that can be specified by the card and convert it into a gaming ball , Or shared ball processing, or wagon service processing). Alternatively, the “predetermined process” may be a process in which a prize is exchanged by receiving a card with a prize exchange machine for exchanging prizes and consuming the points specified by the card.

  Further, the above-mentioned “processing so that predetermined processing can be performed with the game point as the holding point when a predetermined recording medium processing operation is detected” means, for example, when a card return operation is detected In this process, the score is recorded on the card inserted in the CU so as to be specified, and the card is returned. Here, “recordably specified” means that the score is directly recorded on the card, and the card ID and score are recorded on the server connected to the CU without recording the score on the card. And a method of storing IDs and points in association with each other in the server.

  (13) In the present embodiment, (A) the fact that game points of “predetermined points” or more are not stored, game points are not counted even if a counting operation is performed. Is done. In the embodiment, when (B) the game points are counted until the stored game points reach the “predetermined number of points”, no more points can be counted, and a notification to that effect is given. Is done. The same number may be adopted as the predetermined number of points in these two cases (A) and (B), that is, the reference value may be different.

  (14) In the present embodiment, when the counting operation is performed during the ball firing, the counting operation is invalidated when the number of game balls at that time is equal to or less than the reference value. However, even if the number of game balls when the counting operation is detected during the ball firing exceeds the reference value, the number of balls counted in one counting operation is set to a predetermined number. In some cases, the counting operation may be invalidated when the value obtained by subtracting the predetermined number from the number of game balls when the counting operation is detected does not satisfy the reference value.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in order to invalidate the counting operation during the game, it is determined whether or not the game is in progress based on whether or not the ball firing operation has been detected. In addition to this, whether the number of in-game balls (floating balls floating in the game area 27) is 0 (not in game) or not (in game), whether or not in game You may make it determine. In addition, it is also possible to determine whether or not the game is in progress based on whether or not the variable display device is changing, whether or not it is a big hit, whether or not the attacker is open.

  Further, “in game” when S units are applied as a gaming machine and the counting operation during the game is invalidated is, for example, a period from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R to the stop. . Alternatively, it is a period from when the start operation is detected until the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped.

  (15) In FIG. 75, the process proceeds to S483 on condition that no big hit has occurred (NO in S482), but the step of S482 may be deleted and the process may proceed from S481 to S483. That is, regardless of whether or not a big hit is being made, when the number of game balls is greater than a predetermined number, a display for prompting a counting operation may be performed.

  Further, the steps of S486 and S487 may be deleted. That is, in FIG. 75, when the counting operation is not detected even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display for prompting the counting operation, the game ball is forcibly stopped. It may not be performed.

  (16) Referring to FIG. 12, the P platform is provided with a counting ball number counter that temporarily stores the counted counting balls (held balls), but does not include a counter that stores the cumulative value of the counting balls. . However, a counting ball cumulative storage counter that stores the cumulative value of counting balls may be provided on the P platform side. In addition, the CU side is provided with an area for storing card holding balls (counting balls). If a holding ball is recorded on the inserted card itself, this area holds the card holding ball. The current number of players' balls, including balls, is stored. For this reason, only in this area, the number of counting balls counted by the player in the current game cannot be specified. Therefore, an area for storing the number of counting balls counted by the player in this game may be further provided on the CU side. In this case, the CU adds balls to the area based on the information on the number of balls that are sent from the P cars after the game starts, and when the balls are converted into game balls, Subtract the holding ball.

  (17) The display for prompting the counting operation in FIG. 53 may be a display of “Please play the game after the game balls are left, so please return it” or a count button on the screen. The display may be such that 28 is displayed and blinks.

  (18) In the present embodiment, when the number of game balls is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (3,000 balls or more), “control for performing display for prompting counting operation on display” is executed as “predetermined notification control”. Is done. Here, “prompt for counting operation” is, for example, a message indicating “Please count, because the number of game balls has reached the upper limit”, or simply “Counting operation is required”. There may be. Further, the “predetermined notification control” may be a control for outputting a notification sound for prompting a counting operation from a speaker. Further, the “notification” may not be “notification for prompting the counting operation” but simply notify that “the number of game balls has reached the upper limit” (not to prompt for the counting operation). .

  Further, when the game point is equal to or greater than a predetermined first reference value (3000 balls or more), “predetermined notification control” is performed, and thereafter, the game point is set to a second reference value greater than the first reference value. It may be controlled so that the game is disabled when the game point is reached, and the game is permitted (no firing prohibited) until the game point reaches the second reference value from the first reference value. In the case where the gaming machine is a slot machine, the inoperable state can be realized by controlling the start lever to operate so that the reel does not start rotating or the betting number setting is invalidated.

  (19) In the present embodiment, when a game using game points is being performed (while the ball is being fired), if there are no more game points remaining (eg, 250 points), the counting operation is performed. Not activated. Here, the predetermined number of points is not limited to 250 points, and may be any number as long as it is 1 point or more. However, for example, when an excessively small number of points such as one point is set, a malfunction occurs when the timing of firing and the timing of counting occur almost simultaneously. Alternatively, if a counting operation is detected when the number of points is equal to or less than a predetermined number (for example, 10 points or less) and the counting operation is detected, 5 points are left for launching and the remaining points are counted. You may control to.

  In addition, when it is detected that a player who notices that the counting operation has been invalidated because there are no more points left than the predetermined number of points has been stopped, it is invalidated first. The counting operation may be activated to automatically start the counting operation. That is, in this case, the player who notices that the counting operation has been invalidated only needs to stop the firing operation, and does not need to perform the counting operation again.

  (20) In order to change the number of game points to be converted by one operation according to the time for which the count button is kept pressed, for example, when a long press (for example, continuous operation for 1 second or more), While all are counted, only 200 balls may be counted in a short press (for example, continuous operation for less than 1 second). However, in this case, when the remaining number of game balls is small, for example, when it is less than 200 balls, it is desirable that all game balls are counted by operating the counting button.

  (21) When the number of points counted by one short pressing operation of the counting button is made different according to the remaining number of game points, for example, the following may be considered. For example, when the number of game points is less than 200, all the game points are counted by one short press operation of the counting button. When the game points are 200 or more and less than 1000, 200 points are counted by one short press operation. When the game points are 1000 or more and less than 5000, 1000 points are counted by one short press operation. When the game points are 5000 or more and less than 10,000, 2000 points are counted by one short press operation. When the number of game points is 10,000 or more, 2500 points are counted by one short press operation. The above numerical values are specific examples and can be set as appropriate.

  (22) When counting game balls (game points) and converting points, not only counting display but also counting sound may be output from a speaker. In addition, when counting the game points, it is conceivable to display an image in which balls are dropped one by one from the ball storage tray to the counter.

  (23) Timing for performing conversion display (display indicating that game balls are counted and the number of balls is increased) based on the counting operation and subtracting game points on the data The timing for adding the points can be varied. The calculation may be executed after the conversion display is completed. For this purpose, count data may be transmitted from the gaming machine to the CU after the conversion display is completed. It should be noted that such a modification can be similarly applied to the case where the points are converted into game points.

  (24) In the present embodiment, in the communication between the CU and the gaming machine, a command-response method is adopted in which the CU is a primary station and the gaming machine is a secondary station. The relationship between and may be reversed. Alternatively, instead of adopting such a communication system having a master-slave relationship, a system may be employed in which both send data to the other party when a request to communicate occurs.

  (25) In FIG. 12 or 79, the game balls (game points) are stored on both the gaming machine side and the CU side, but the game balls (game points) are stored only on the game machine side, and the CU It may not be stored on the side. On the other hand, the card holding balls (scoring points) are stored only on the CU side, but may also be stored on the gaming machine side. In particular, game balls (game points) are stored only on the gaming machine side, while card holding balls (points) are stored only on the CU side to clarify the division of data storage management. Good.

  (26) The counting display and various notifications performed on the display 54 may be performed on the display 312 in the same manner.

  (27) In CU3, based on the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number) and the value of the subtracted ball number counter (subtracted ball number) transmitted from the P platform side, the stored game ball number is updated. When the number of game balls stored is subtracted based on the value of the counting ball number counter transmitted from the P platform side, if the value of the number of game balls becomes negative, an error (abnormal) determination is made. Then, error processing may be performed. As a specific example of error processing, error notification is performed by an abnormality notification lamp or the like, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or hall server 801 (in this case, hall management). An error notification may be performed by a computer or hall server 801).

  (28) In the above-described embodiment, the high level signal is input to the main control board 16 and the payout control board 17 when the radio sensors 163 and 173 detect radio waves. However, the radio sensors 163 and 173 Inverting amplifiers (inverters) for inverting the signals may be provided in the radio wave sensors 163 and 173 so that the signals are input to the main control board 16 and the payout control board 17 via the inverting amplifiers. By doing so, a high level signal is inputted to the main control board 16 and the payout control board 17 when the radio wave sensors 163 and 173 are not detected, while a low level signal is inputted when the radio wave is detected and the main control board 16 is detected. When the occurrence of abnormality is determined on the payout control board 17 and the radio wave sensors 163 and 173 are illegally pulled out, a low level signal is input to the main control board 16 and the payout control board 17 and the same as when detecting the radio wave. In addition, the main control board 16 and the payout control board 17 can determine whether an abnormality has occurred.

  (29) When the game board radio wave sensor disconnection detection or the game frame radio wave sensor disconnection detection is input to the payout control board 17, the payout control board 17 may be disabled. Specific examples of the deactivation include stopping transmission of the number of additional balls to the CU 3 and stopping the counting operation of the additional ball counter.

  (30) When a lending operation or a conversion operation (lending operation) from a holding point (holding ball) to a gaming point (game ball) is detected, the gaming points may be counted up one by one. In order to shorten the waiting time of the player, a display may be made so that a plurality of points (for example, 25 points equivalent to 100 yen) are counted up. Conversely, when a game point counting operation is executed, a display may be made so that the points are counted up by a plurality of points. Furthermore, the number of units for counting up and displaying game points or points may be set from a plurality of types. In the setting, it is conceivable to use a touch panel of P or S display devices.

  (31) When the counting operation is executed, the holding points may be counted up at an accelerated speed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the starting of counting up the holding points. Alternatively, a speed-up button for accelerating the count display may be displayed on the touch panel display on the CU side or the gaming machine side, and the operation may be detected to display the acceleration count display. By performing the acceleration counting display of the points in this way, it is possible to shorten the waiting time of the player when counting a large number of game points.

  (32) A touch sensor may be provided on the hitting operation handle, and the counting operation may be invalidated while the touch sensor detects that the player is holding the hitting operation handle. Invalidating the coefficient operation means both detecting the counting operation but not executing the counting operation based on the detection output, or not detecting the counting operation itself. Or, if the player does not invalidate the counting operation only by touching the hitting operation handle, and if the counting operation is disabled if the hitting operation handle is turned to such an extent that the ball firing drive pulse is output. Good.

  In these cases, when a counting operation is detected, a message “Please release handle” may be displayed on the display of the gaming machine or CU. Alternatively, when the counting operation button is displayed as an icon on the touch panel screen, the counting operation button may be grayed out to notify the player that the operation is impossible.

  (33) At least one or all of the ball lending button, the return button, the replay button, and the counting button may be provided on the gaming machine side, or may be provided on the CU side. Further, it is conceivable that the button is displayed on the display device on the gaming machine side or the CU side described as the touch panel type display device.

  (34) The gaming system according to the present embodiment includes a point use operation means for executing a predetermined point use process using points. Here, the predetermined score use processing includes processing for executing the wagon service, or processing for dividing and sharing the score (held ball) (processing for dividing and transferring the score to another person). It is a concept. The holding point use operation means is, for example, a touch panel. Alternatively, the point use operation means may be a remote controller that is given to a clerk of the game store to instruct the CU or the gaming machine to execute the point use processing.

  (35) The sequence control shown in FIG. 40 to FIG. 73 is not limited to the transmission / reception sequence between control devices in a single gaming machine such as CU3, P stand 2, S stand 2S, etc., particularly for processing related to security. Instead, for example, the present invention may be applied to a transmission / reception sequence between a plurality of gaming machines such as CU3, P unit 2, jet counter, and POS terminal.

  (36) In the above-described embodiment, the identity of the player is determined based on the card ID. Instead of or in addition to this, the identity of the player is determined based on the player's fingerprint, retina and other biomass. A determination may be made.

  (37) In the above-described embodiment, as described in FIG. 62, FIG. 64, FIG. 66, and the like, the CU presents the score transmitted from the gaming machine on condition that the card ID matches the insertion time. Is sent from the gaming machine as a further condition that the communication has started before a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has passed since the communication between the gaming machine and the CU3 was interrupted. The score may be controlled so that the CU stores it as the current score. Specifically, a timer for measuring a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) after communication between the gaming machine and CU3 is interrupted is provided in the CU control unit 323 at the start of communication between the gaming machine and CU3 (at the time of recovery). It is determined whether or not the timer is still timed (in a state where time is not up), and on the further condition that it is a result of determination that the timer is timed, the score sent from the gaming machine is the current value of the CU. It controls to memorize as a score.

  Further, instead of the insertion time, the CU may store the score transmitted from the gaming machine on condition that the last serial number used between the CU 3 and the P stand 2 matches, as the current score. .

  (38) In the above-described embodiment, the number of game balls and game points are directly added by the occurrence of a win, but instead, the points are added by the occurrence of a win, and the added points are added. It may be controlled to withdraw and add the number of game balls or game points.

  (39) In the above-described embodiment, when the value is withdrawn within the range of the valuable value owned by the player (prepaid balance, holding balls, savings) and the corresponding game points are added, the value withdrawn. However, instead, for example, it may be controlled to add game points that are smaller by the amount equivalent to the consumption tax with respect to the value actually withdrawn.

  (40) In this embodiment, a key management server is installed in a key management center that is remote from the game arcade. However, the key management server may be installed in the game hall. Thereby, compared with the case where a key management server is installed outside the game hall, it is easier to speed up communication between the CU and the key management server, and the occurrence rate of communication failures can be reduced.

  (41) A restriction other than the time restriction may be adopted as the restriction in the restricted communication mode. For example, the amount of game value that can be used for games (remaining usable card amount, usable storage ball, etc.) may be limited.

  (42) The CU control unit 323 receives the board security information (including the board authentication key and the update information) from the key management server 800 via the hall server 801. However, instead of this, the board security information is transmitted from the key management server 800 to the CU control unit 323 without using the hall server 801 between the key management server 800 and the CU control unit 323. For example, it is conceivable that the key management server 800 and the CU are directly connected to each other, or a relay communication device different from the hall server 801 is provided between the key management server 800 and each CU.

  (43) In the above-described embodiment, the number of counting balls automatically counted based on the leaving operation is temporarily added to the holding ball and written to the card to perform the leaving processing, and thereafter When the player who has left the seat returns, the card is inserted into the original card unit again, and the possession ball is converted into a game ball. Indicated. However, instead, the counting ball automatically counted at the time of the leaving operation is stored as a custody ball (also storing the C-ID and insertion time) different from the game ball and the holding ball, and the holding ball is not added. Leave your seat by ejecting the card without having to record the ball. When the discharge card is reinserted, all the custody balls may be automatically converted into P game balls at once and control may be performed. Alternatively, the custody balls in this case are transmitted from the P platform to the CU based on the leaving operation, stored on the CU side or the hall server side, and automatically from the CU or the hall server when the card is inserted again. Alternatively, the information on the custody ball may be transmitted to the P platform side and stored as a game ball on the P platform side. Further, in this case, when the information on the custody balls is transmitted, it may be transmitted from the CU to the P units as a game ball addition command.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the number of counting balls automatically counted based on the leaving operation is added to the holding ball and written to the card and discharged, the away flag is set on the card. By keeping a record, the card could not be exchanged for prizes. As a technique for prohibiting the exchange of prizes as described above, the following technique other than using the away flag on the card may be adopted.

  First. When the leaving operation is performed, the information (including the card ID) is transmitted from the CU to the hall server, and the card of the player who is away from the hall server is stored as the leaving card. At the time of prize exchange, an inquiry is made to the hall server from the POS or the like, and the hall server determines whether or not the card used for the prize exchange is an away card. Alternatively, all away card information may be transmitted from the hall server to the POS side in advance. In addition, if the card used for exchanging the prize is an away card, exchanging the prize using the card is prohibited.

  (44) In the above embodiment, the gaming machine determines that the gaming device (CU) is given the game points as the holding points on the condition that the conversion process for all game points is completed (game points = 0). (Processing that accepts a card with a prize exchange machine and consumes the points specified by the card and enables prize exchange, and inserts a card discharged from the CU into another CU connected to another gaming machine. A validating means for validating the recording medium processing operation (card return operation (operation of the return button 322)) for performing the processing of the CU when used in the same manner.

  (45) In the present embodiment, as an example of the game information, the ball number, the game ball, the remaining amount of the card, the storage ball, and the number of balls information and the game table information described in FIG. 16 have been described. However, the game information includes other information related to the game on the gaming machine. For example, when a player's favorite character selected or customized by the player can be displayed on variable display means (variable display device) such as the variable display device 278 or the display device 54, information that can specify the character Is also included in the game information. Information on the screen design including the character that matches the player's preference is transmitted to the server at the end of the game in association with the player's card ID and stored, for example, when starting a new game. You may make it download from a server to CU or P stand.

  (46) On the game ball number display 29, a display is made in which the number of balls is decreased one by one in conjunction with the ball firing or counting operation. In addition, the game ball number display 29 displays such that the number of balls increases by one or a predetermined number of units according to a ball lending operation or the like. When the game ball number display 29 is constituted by an image display such as a liquid crystal display device, the number of game balls is not simply displayed digitally, but whether the change in the number of game balls is due to a ball or not is counted. Whether it is due to winning, winning a prize, due to savings, or due to a lending operation, an image according to the type is displayed along with the display update of the number of game balls You may make it do.

  In addition, when the counting operation is performed, the game ball number display 29 performs counting display in conjunction with the counting operation, but when the game ball number display 29 is configured by an image display such as a liquid crystal display device. In the same manner as the display 54, the number of game balls may be counted and the number thereof may be decreased, while an image display in which the number of holding balls is increased may be performed. In this case, as described above as a modification of the display of the display unit 54, the display of the number of game balls converted to the number of balls data over time (for example, a bar graph display), the current The number of game balls and the number of balls are digitally displayed as they are, and the number of balls is increased while decreasing the number of balls, or the display of moving a part of the number of balls to the number of balls is repeated. It is possible.

<Various configurations included in the embodiment>
(1-1) The present invention uses the gaming machine that grants a predetermined game point by the occurrence of a prize and the gaming value (for example, the remaining card amount, the number of possessions, the number of accumulated balls, etc.) owned by the player. A gaming system including a gaming device (CU) that enables gaming with machines (P units, S units),
Conversion operation means (counting buttons 28, 28S) for converting the gaming points into predetermined points;
Conversion processing means (CU control unit 323, payout control unit 171) for converting the gaming points to the predetermined holding points based on the detection of the operation of the conversion operation means;
When a predetermined recording medium processing operation (card return operation (operation of the return button 322)) is detected, on condition that the conversion processing is completed (see FIG. 53), the game points are set as predetermined points. Processing (processing that accepts a card at the gift exchange and consumes the points specified by the card and enables the exchange of the gift, and inserts the card discharged from the CU into another CU connected to another gaming machine. Recording medium processing (processing to make it possible to specify the ball with the ID of the card, for example, recording the ball on the card, or holding the ball with a computer) Recording medium processing means (CU control unit 323) for performing (ID management),
The gaming machine is
Specific means (addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter) for specifying the amount of change of the game points;
Information transmission means (payout control unit 171) for transmitting update information (response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls) that can identify the amount of change to the gaming device;
A change amount storage means for storing a change amount scheduled to be transmitted by the information transmission means as the update information and storing the transmitted change amount when the information transmission means transmits the change amount (the latest game table in FIG. 12) Information, the area for storing the last game machine information),
And arrival determination means (payout control unit 171) for determining that the update information has arrived at the gaming apparatus based on predetermined information (serial number) transmitted from the gaming apparatus,
The gaming device is:
Game point storage means for storing the game points (area for storing the number of game balls in FIG. 12);
Game point update means for updating the game points stored in the game point storage means based on the update information (see “adding the number of game balls”, “subtracting the number of game balls” in FIG. 12);
Confirmation information transmitting means (CU control unit 323) for transmitting information (serial number) that can confirm the arrival of the update information to the gaming machine based on the reception of the update information,
The information transmission means, when the arrival determination means does not determine that the update information has arrived, is the sum of the change amount scheduled to be transmitted and the change amount already transmitted stored in the change amount storage means Is transmitted to the gaming device (see FIG. 70).

  According to the above configuration, the recording medium processing operation can be performed through the process of converting all the game points obtained by the game into points by the player's operation. Therefore, a new system using game points without causing confusion to a player who is accustomed to the conventional game system that counts game media obtained by gaming and makes it possible to specify the counting result by a recording medium Can provide.

  Furthermore, when the arrival determination means does not determine that the update information has arrived, update information that can specify the sum of the change amount scheduled to be transmitted and the already transmitted change amount stored in the change amount storage means is used for gaming. Since it is transmitted to the device, the change amount of the game points can be transmitted to the gaming device reliably and efficiently.

(1-2) The present invention uses a gaming value (for example, the remaining card amount, the number of possessions, the number of accumulated balls, etc.) owned by a player to give a predetermined gaming point (P units) when a winning is generated. A gaming device (CU) that enables games on S units,
Conversion processing means for performing conversion processing of the gaming points to the predetermined points based on detection of an operation (operation of the counting buttons 28 and 28S) for converting the gaming points to the predetermined points. (CU control unit 323),
When a predetermined recording medium processing operation (card return operation (operation of the return button 322)) is detected, on the condition that the conversion processing has been completed, the game points are used as the holding points for the predetermined processing (in the gift exchange) A process for accepting a card and consuming the points specified by the card and enabling the exchange of prizes, and a case where the card discharged from the CU is inserted into another CU connected to another gaming machine and used. CU processing) is performed so that the recording medium processing (processing that makes it possible to specify the ball with the ID of the card, for example, recording the ball on the card or ID management with the computer) Recording medium processing means (CU control unit 323);
Game point storage means for storing the game points (“the number of game balls” in FIG. 12);
Information receiving means (CU control unit 323) for receiving update information (a response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls) transmitted from the gaming machine and capable of specifying the amount of change in the gaming points;
Game point update means for updating the game points stored in the game point storage means based on the update information (see “adding the number of game balls”, “subtracting the number of game balls” in FIG. 12);
Confirmation information transmitting means (CU control unit 323) for transmitting information (serial number) that can confirm the arrival of the update information to the gaming machine based on the reception of the update information,
The information receiving means, when the update information transmitted from the gaming machine at a predetermined timing has not yet reached, adds a sum of the unreachable update information and the amount of change in the gaming points after the predetermined timing. Receive identifiable update information (see FIG. 70),
The game point update means updates the game points stored in the game point storage means based on update information that can specify the total value (see FIG. 70).

  According to the above configuration, the recording medium processing operation can be performed through the process of converting all the game points obtained by the game into points by the player's operation. For this reason, the game media obtained by the game can be counted, and the counting result can be specified by the recording media. For a new game using the game points without causing confusion to the player who is used to the conventional game operation. Equipment can be provided.

  Further, when the update information transmitted at a predetermined timing from the gaming machine has not yet arrived, the update information capable of specifying the sum of the unreachable update information and the change amount of the gaming points after the predetermined timing is received. Therefore, the amount of change of game points can be identified reliably and efficiently.

(1-3) In the gaming system according to (1-1),
Display means (displays 54, 312 and 510) for performing conversion display of the game points into the predetermined points;
The gaming device controls the display means, updates the display of the game points based on the update information, and detects that the operation of the conversion operation means (operation of the counting buttons 28 and 28S) is detected. Display control means (display control unit 350) for converting the gaming points into the predetermined points.

  According to the above configuration, the display of game points and the display of conversion from game points to points on the display means are controlled on the gaming device side, so the control burden on the gaming machine side can be reduced.

(1-4) (1-1) In the gaming system according to (1-3),
Game points for performing predetermined notification control (control for displaying a prompt for a counting operation on a display) when the game points stored in the game point storage means are a predetermined number or more (3000 balls or more) Notification control means (S489 in FIG. 75) is included.

  According to the above configuration, since predetermined notification control is performed when the number of game points is greater than or equal to a predetermined number of points, a system similar to the conventional system that notifies when the game medium is full can be reproduced in a pseudo manner. It is possible to provide a system that is familiar to players who are accustomed to the gaming system.

(1-5) In the gaming system according to (1-1) (1-3) (1-4),
When a game is being played by the gaming machine using the game points (while the ball is being fired), the game points of the predetermined number or more (for example, 250 points or more) remain on the condition Conversion operation validation means (FIG. 56) for validating the operation of the conversion operation means is included.

  According to the above configuration, when a game using game points is being performed, the conversion operation by the conversion operation means is not effective unless there are at least a predetermined number of game points remaining. The timing when the game points that have not been converted are displayed and the timing when the remaining few game points are consumed by the continuation of the game overlap, and the game points necessary for the game have been converted and displayed as points Regardless of this situation, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game is continued.

(1-6) In the gaming system according to (1-1) (1-3) to (1-5),
A score storage means for storing the score (“card holding ball (counting ball)” on the CU side in FIG. 12);
A point use operation means (touch panel) for executing a predetermined point use process using the points (converting points into game points, sharing points using points, wagon service using points) ; FIG. 5 etc.)
On the basis of the detected operation of the holding point use operation means, a deduction means for subtracting the points necessary for the holding point use processing from the holding points stored in the holding point storage means (FIG. 72, FIG. 73)
When the score stored in the score storage means is less than the score required for the score use processing, the predetermined notification control (Fig. 72, Fig. 73; "Please press the count button for lack of balls" ”And a display control unit (display control unit 350).

  According to the above configuration, the score use processing can be executed in exchange for the score after conversion, and when the remaining score is less than the number necessary for the score use processing, predetermined notification control is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to perform an operation for converting the game points into points in order to execute the desired point use processing.

(1-7) (1) In the gaming system according to (1-3) to (1-6),
A total conversion operation (“total counting” in FIG. 77) for converting all game points stored in the game point storage means into the holding points in response to an operation on the conversion operation means, and the game points A partial conversion operation (“partial counting” in FIG. 77) for converting a part of the game points stored in the storage means into the holding points can be executed.

  According to the above configuration, the game points can be converted completely and partially, so that it is closer to the conventional gaming system that allows partial counting of gaming media obtained by gaming. A new system using game points can be provided.

(1-8) (1-6) In the gaming system according to (1-7),
Service notification control means (display control unit 350; display of goods that can receive a wagon service) that performs control to notify a service that a player can receive using the points,
Deduction means (CU control unit 323) for deducting points necessary for the service from the score stored in the score storage means based on the detected operation of the score use operation means. Including
The service notification control means is a case where game points are stored in the game point storage means when the points stored in the score storage means are less than the points required for a predetermined service. Is also controlled not to notify the predetermined service as a service that can be received by the player (by converting the game ball into a current ball with a counting button and adding the converted ball to the current ball Products that can be purchased are displayed as a dotted line, and are not notified as services that the player can receive).

  According to such a configuration, the service that the player can receive using the points is notified, and the service that the player can receive can be recognized. In addition, even when game points are stored in the game point storage means when the score is less than the number required for the predetermined service, the predetermined service is notified as a service that can be received by the player. Since such control is not performed, it is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood that the service can be received within the range of points.

(2-1) The present invention uses the gaming machine that grants a predetermined game point by the occurrence of a prize, and the game value (for example, the remaining card amount, the number of balls, the number of balls, etc.) owned by the player. A gaming system including a gaming device (CU) that enables gaming with machines (P units, S units),
Conversion operation means (counting buttons 28, 28S) for converting the gaming points into predetermined points;
Conversion processing means (CU control unit 323, payout control unit 171) for converting the gaming points to the predetermined holding points based on the detection of the operation of the conversion operation means;
When a predetermined recording medium processing operation (card return operation (operation of the return button 322)) is detected, on condition that the conversion processing is completed (see FIG. 53), the game points are set as predetermined points. Processing (processing that accepts a card at the gift exchange and consumes the points specified by the card and enables the exchange of the gift, and inserts the card discharged from the CU into another CU connected to another gaming machine. Recording medium processing (processing to make it possible to specify the ball with the ID of the card, for example, recording the ball on the card, or holding the ball with a computer) Recording medium processing means (CU control unit 323) for performing (ID management),
The gaming machine is
Specific means (addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter) for specifying the amount of change of the game points;
Information transmission means (payout control unit 171) for transmitting update information (response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls) that can identify the amount of change to the gaming device;
Game machine side game point storage means for storing the game points (game ball counter of FIG. 12),
The gaming device is:
A game device-side game point storage means for storing the game points (an area for storing the number of game balls in FIG. 12);
Game point update means for updating the game points stored in the game device side game point storage means based on the update information (see “add game balls” and “subtract game balls” in FIG. 12) When,
A game point adding means for deducting the gaming value and adding an equivalent amount to the gaming points stored in the gaming device side gaming point storage means (FIG. 47; deducting the gaming value by depressing a lending button) Confirm the prepaid consumption and add the number of additional balls),
Addition information transmitting means (FIG. 47) for transmitting game point addition information (FIG. 47; game ball addition request ON, number of added balls = 125) capable of specifying the game points to be added to the gaming machine;
The information transmission means stores the update information during addition update processing that can specify the amount of change of the game point specified by the specifying means during the addition update, stored in the gaming machine side game point storage means The point is transmitted to the gaming device together with identifiable information (FIG. 47; status information response (number of game balls = 172, number of subtraction balls = 3)), and includes addition response transmission means (FIG. 47),
The game point update means updates the game points stored in the game apparatus side game point storage means based on the transmitted update information during addition update processing (FIG. 47; 175-game balls number). 3 and updated to 172).

  According to the above configuration, the recording medium processing operation can be performed through the process of converting all the game points obtained by the game into points by the player's operation. Therefore, a new system using game points without causing confusion to a player who is accustomed to the conventional game system that counts game media obtained by gaming and makes it possible to specify the counting result by a recording medium Can provide.

  Furthermore, when the game point changes on the game machine side while adding and updating the game points based on the game point addition information transmitted from the gaming device to the game machine, the amount of change can be specified during the update process. Since the information is transmitted to the gaming device together with information that can specify the updated game points including the information during the addition update process, information for notifying game point update by the game point addition information, Communication efficiency can be improved compared to the case where information for notifying a change in game points due to a game or the like on the machine side is separately transmitted to the gaming device at different timings.

(3-1) The present invention uses the gaming machine that grants a predetermined game point by the occurrence of a winning and the game value (for example, the remaining card amount, the number of balls, the number of balls, etc.) owned by the player. A gaming system including a gaming device (CU) that enables gaming with machines (P units, S units),
Conversion operation means (counting buttons 28, 28S) for converting the gaming points into predetermined points;
Conversion processing means (CU control unit 323, payout control unit 171) for converting the gaming points to the predetermined holding points based on the detection of the operation of the conversion operation means;
When a predetermined recording medium processing operation (card return operation (operation of the return button 322)) is detected, on condition that the conversion processing is completed (see FIG. 53), the game points are set as predetermined points. Processing (processing that accepts a card at the gift exchange and consumes the points specified by the card and enables the exchange of the gift, and inserts the card discharged from the CU into another CU connected to another gaming machine. Recording medium processing (processing to make it possible to specify the ball with the ID of the card, for example, recording the ball on the card, or holding the ball with a computer) Recording medium processing means (CU control unit 323) for performing (ID management),
The gaming machine is
Specific means (addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter) for specifying the amount of change of the game points;
Update information (response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls) that can specify the amount of change, and information transmitting means (payout control unit 171) for transmitting to the gaming device,
The gaming device is:
Game point storage means for storing the game points (area for storing the number of game balls in FIG. 12);
Game point update means for updating the game points stored in the game point storage means based on the update information (see “adding the number of game balls”, “subtracting the number of game balls” in FIG. 12);
Recovery processing means (FIGS. 57 to 67; communication line disconnection or power supply disconnection) for performing recovery processing for recovering the consistency of game points with the gaming machine by recovering from an incommunicable state incapable of communicating with the gaming machine And later recovery processing)
The gaming machine is unable to communicate by accumulating and storing the amount of change of the gaming points specified by the specifying means during the period from when the incommunicable state occurs until the recovery processing by the recovery processing means is executed. Time accumulation storage means (FIG. 58; after transmitting the status information response of serial number = n + 1, before the next status information request arrives, the power interruption occurred, and the change in the gaming machine information during that time is accumulated)
The information transmitting means provides the game device with cumulative update information that can specify a cumulative change amount of game points stored in the cumulative communication means when communication is impossible when the recovery processing is performed by the recovery processing means. (FIG. 58; Recovery data (previous gaming machine information, current gaming machine information) is notified in the recovery detailed response)
The game point update means updates the game points stored in the game point storage means based on the cumulative update information by performing the recovery process (FIG. 58; the CU receives a recovery detailed response). And recovery with the latest game machine information).

  According to the above configuration, the recording medium processing operation can be performed through the process of converting all the game points obtained by the game into points by the player's operation. Therefore, a new system using game points without causing confusion to a player who is accustomed to the conventional game system that counts game media obtained by gaming and makes it possible to specify the counting result by a recording medium Can provide.

  Further, when recovering from the incommunicable state, cumulative update information that can specify the cumulative change amount of the gaming points stored in the incommunicable cumulative storage means is transmitted to the gaming device, and the gaming device side Since the game points stored in the game point storage means are updated based on the update information, the amount of change in the game points on the gaming machine side from when the communication is disabled until it is restored is also reflected. It becomes possible to provide the game again at an accurate game point.

  Note that, in the communication disabled state, the gaming point changes on the gaming device side, and the change of the gaming point on the gaming device side is transmitted to the gaming machine by the restoration process, and the gaming point is updated (corrected) on the gaming machine side. A specific example of the case is shown in FIG. According to FIG. 67, “the game device recovers from the incommunicable state in which communication with the game device cannot be performed and recovers the consistency of the game points with the game device. The game device includes a recovery processing unit that performs a change amount of the game point specified by the specifying unit during a period from when the communication disabled state occurs until a recovery process is executed by the gaming device. When the restoration process is performed, the gaming device stores a cumulative change amount of game points stored in the cumulative communication time non-communication means when the restoration process is performed. “Transmit identifiable cumulative update information to the gaming device” is disclosed.

(A-1) The present invention is connected to a gaming machine (P 2) that gives a predetermined gaming point by the occurrence of a prize and a gaming value (card balance, A gaming system comprising a gaming device (CU3) that enables gaming on the gaming machine using a storage ball or the like,
The gaming machine is
Game point storage means for storing the game points (game ball counter in FIG. 12);
A first display section (game ball number display 29);
First display control means (main control part 161) for displaying the game points on the first display unit based on the storage of the game point storage means;
A second display unit (display 54) for displaying game information (eg, points, balance, number of game balls) stored in the gaming device;
The gaming device is:
Game information storage means for storing game information including the game value (each storage area on the CU3 side in FIG. 12);
Display control means (display control part 350) for executing display control for displaying information based on the storage of the game information storage means on the second display part.

  According to such a configuration, the display control of the first display unit that displays the gaming points is performed by the gaming machine that stores the gaming points and is involved in the variation of the gaming points, so that the gaming points are used and subtracted in the game, Alternatively, when added by a game, the updated game point can be immediately reflected on the first display unit. On the other hand, since the second display unit performs display control on the gaming device side, a gaming machine that controls display of the first display unit further controls display of the second display unit as well. The display control burden can be reduced.

(A-2) The present invention provides a gaming device (CU3) for giving a predetermined game point by the occurrence of a winning and enabling a game using a player's own gaming value (card balance, accumulated ball, etc.). ) That is communicably connected to the game machine (P 2),
Game point storage means for storing the game points (game ball counter in FIG. 12);
A first display section (game ball number display 29);
Display control means (main control part 161) for displaying the game points on the first display part based on the storage of the game point storage means;
Display control of game information stored in the gaming device by the gaming device (a display control signal is transmitted from the CU3 and selectively transmitted to the display 54 by the switching circuit 141 (FIG. 6), etc.) And a second display unit (display unit 54).

  According to such a configuration, the display control of the first display unit that displays the gaming points is performed by the gaming machine that stores the gaming points and is involved in the variation of the gaming points, so that the gaming points are used and subtracted in the game, Alternatively, when added by a game, the updated game point can be immediately reflected on the first display unit. On the other hand, since the second display unit is display-controlled on the gaming device side, it is compared with the case where the gaming machine that controls the display of the first display unit also controls the display of the second display unit. Thus, the display control burden on the gaming machine can be reduced.

(A-3) In the gaming system according to (A-1),
The game information stored in the game information storage means includes a predetermined score,
The gaming machine is
Conversion operation means (counting button 28) for converting the gaming points into the possession points;
Conversion request transmission means for transmitting the game point conversion request to the gaming device based on the detection of the operation of the conversion operation means (count request = ON, count ball count = 0 shown in FIG. 49, etc.) Status information response)
Subtraction for subtracting the game points stored in the game point storage means on condition that a response from the gaming device to the conversion request (counting response shown in FIG. 49 etc. = ON state information request) is received. Means (see FIG. 49 etc.),
The first display control means updates the display of the game points of the first display unit based on the subtraction of the subtraction means (updates the display of the game ball number display 29 by the count),
The gaming apparatus includes a score adding means (see FIG. 49, etc.) for adding a score corresponding to the game point subtracted by the subtracting means to the score stored in the game information storage means,
The display control means executes display control for displaying the holding points on the second display unit (in the display unit 54, the number of game balls is counted and the number thereof decreases, while the number of holding balls increases. Image display).

  According to such a configuration, when there is an operation of the conversion operation means for converting the gaming points into points, the conversion processing is not executed immediately, but a conversion request is sent from the gaming machine to the gaming device. Is transmitted, and a conversion process is executed after a response is returned from the gaming device to the gaming machine. For this reason, it is possible to perform conversion processing after confirming whether or not processing on the gaming device side is possible, compared to control in which conversion processing is immediately executed on the gaming machine side. While the conversion process is completed, the gaming apparatus side cannot execute the conversion process, and it is possible to prevent the two apparatuses from being inconsistent.

(A-4) In the gaming system according to (A-3),
The display control means executes display control for causing the second display unit to display a conversion display of the game points to the holding points based on an operation of the conversion operation means,
The gaming device is:
A recording medium processing means for performing processing so as to enable predetermined processing (processing for recording a score so as to be specified by a card) using the game point as the score when a predetermined recording medium processing operation is detected; ,
Validating means (see FIG. 53) for validating the recording medium processing operation when conversion display for all game points stored in the gaming point storage means is completed.

  According to such a configuration, since the recording medium processing operation is not validated in a state where game points remain, the player executes the recording medium processing operation while leaving the game points and leaves the game hall. Can be prevented.

  (A-5) In the gaming system described in (A-4), the enabling means may store a predetermined value in the gaming point storage means when a game is being played by the gaming machine using the gaming points. The operation of the conversion operation means is validated on the condition that game points greater than the number of points are stored (see FIG. 56).

  According to such a configuration, when a game using game points is performed, the conversion operation by the conversion operation means is not effective unless there are more game points than the predetermined number. The timing at which the remaining game points are converted and displayed overlaps with the timing at which the remaining few game points are consumed by the continuation of the game, and the game points necessary for the game have been converted into points and displayed. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game is continued in spite of this.

  (A-6) In the gaming system according to (A-3) to (A-4), the recording medium processing operation is detected when conversion display for all game points is not performed by the second display unit. Then, the second display unit performs display for prompting the operation of the conversion operation means (see FIG. 53).

  According to such a configuration, when a recording medium processing operation is detected when conversion display for all game points is not performed by the second display unit, a display prompting the operation of the conversion operation means on the second display unit is displayed. Therefore, the player can be prompted to perform another recording medium processing operation after the conversion operation.

  (A-7) In the gaming system according to any one of (A-3) to (A-6), when the display control execution unit has a predetermined number of game points or more stored in the game point storage unit Then, display control for displaying a predetermined notification on the second display unit is executed (S489 in FIG. 75).

  According to such a configuration, since predetermined notification control is performed if the number of game points is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of points, a system similar to the conventional system that notifies when the game medium is full can be reproduced in a pseudo manner, It is possible to provide a system familiar to players who are accustomed to conventional gaming systems.

  (A-8) In the gaming system according to (A-3) to (A-7), when the gaming points stored in the gaming point storage means are equal to or greater than the predetermined number of points, the gaming machine is It further includes disabling means (S483, S484, S488, S490, S491 in FIG. 75) for controlling the game to be disabled.

  According to such a configuration, when the number of game points stored in the game point storage means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the game is controlled so as not to be played. be able to.

  (A-9) In the gaming system according to any one of (A-3) to (A-8), the display control means is configured such that when a game is performed by the gaming machine using the gaming point, When an operation of the conversion operation unit is detected in a state where no game points equal to or greater than the predetermined number are stored in the game point storage unit, display control is performed to display a first notification on the second display unit. (Refer to FIG. 56 (displaying that the counting operation is invalidated).

  According to such a configuration, the player can understand the reason why the conversion process is not executed by the operation of the conversion operation means during the game.

(A-10) In the gaming system according to any one of (A-3) to (A-9), predetermined score use processing using the score (converting the score into a game point, using the score) A point use operation means (touch panel; FIG. 5 etc.) for executing a point sharing, wagon service using points)
On the basis of the detected operation of the point use operation means, a point deduction means for deducting the points required for the point use processing from the points stored in the game information storage means (FIG. 72, FIG. 73) and
The display control execution means is a display for displaying a predetermined notification on the second display section when the points stored in the game information storage means are less than the number necessary for the point use processing. Control (FIG. 72, FIG. 73; control for displaying on the display that “Please press the counting button for lack of balls”).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the score use processing, and when the remaining score is less than the number required for the score use processing, a predetermined notification is performed, so that the desired score use is performed. In order to execute the process, the player can be prompted to perform an operation for converting the game points into points.

  (A-11) In the gaming system according to any one of (A-3) to (A-10), all the game points stored in the game point storage unit are stored in the game system according to an operation on the conversion operation unit. All conversion operation for converting and displaying to points ("Count all" in FIG. 77) and a part for converting and displaying a part of the game points stored in the game point storage means to the points The conversion operation (“partial counting” in FIG. 77) can be executed.

  According to such a configuration, since all conversion operations and partial conversion operations of game points can be performed, the conventional game system that allows partial counting of game media obtained by gaming can be further improved. It is possible to provide a new system using game points in a close form.

(B-1) The present invention relates to a gaming machine (P 2) that gives a predetermined gaming point by the occurrence of a prize, and a gaming value (card balance, A gaming system comprising a gaming device (CU3) that enables gaming on the gaming machine using a storage ball or the like,
The gaming machine is
A variable display unit (variable display unit of the variable display device 278) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information;
Game control means (main control unit 161) that can be controlled to a state advantageous to the player (big hit state) when the result of the variable display unit becomes a specific display result (both eyes);
An effect display unit (display device 54) for displaying effect information related to the display of the variable display unit (such as the reach screen of patterns 3 and 4 in FIG. 9);
The game device displays the game information on the effect display unit when a condition for displaying game information different from the effect information on the effect display unit is satisfied (the remaining number of game points is 30 or less). Display control means (display control unit 350; the display control signal from the display control unit 350 is input to the switching circuit 141 in FIG. 6, YES in S1421 in FIG. 7).

  According to such a configuration, since the gaming machine includes the effect display unit for displaying the effect information related to the display of the variable display unit, it is possible to provide a game with high effect. In addition, when the condition for displaying the game information on the effect display unit is established, display control for displaying the game information on the effect display unit is executed by the game device. The effect display unit can be used not only for game effects but also for display of game information by the game device, and the display control burden of the gaming machine accompanying the display of game information can be reduced.

(B-2) The present invention provides a gaming device (CU3) for giving a predetermined game point upon occurrence of a winning and enabling a game using a player's own gaming value (card balance, savings, etc.). ) That is communicably connected to the game machine (P 2),
A variable display unit (variable display unit of the variable display device 278) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information;
Game control means (main control unit 161) that can be controlled to a state advantageous to the player (big hit state) when the result of the variable display unit becomes a specific display result (both eyes);
An effect display unit (display device 54) for displaying effect information related to the display of the variable display unit (such as the reach screen of patterns 3 and 4 in FIG. 9);
The effect display unit displays the game information by the game device on the effect display unit when a condition for displaying game information different from the effect information is satisfied (the remaining number of game points is 30 or less). When the display control is executed, the game information can be displayed on the effect display unit (see FIG. 9).

  According to such a configuration, since the gaming machine includes the effect display unit for displaying the effect information related to the display of the variable display unit, it is possible to provide a game with a high effect. Moreover, when the condition for displaying the game information on the effect display unit is established, the game information is displayed on the effect display unit. Therefore, when the condition is established, the effect display unit is displayed only for the game effect. In addition, it can be used for display of game information by the game device, and the display control burden of the gaming machine accompanying display of the game information can be reduced.

(B-3) In the gaming system according to (B-1),
Condition success / failure determining means (S1421 in FIG. 7) for determining success or failure of conditions for displaying game information different from the effect information on the effect display unit is included.

  According to such a configuration, success or failure of the condition for displaying game information is determined, and when it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the game information is displayed on the effect display unit. The condition establishment determining means may be provided on the gaming machine side or on the gaming device side.

(B-4) In the gaming system according to (B-3),
The condition success / failure determination means determines that the condition is satisfied when the game points become a predetermined number or less (see FIG. 7),
When the condition success / failure determination means determines that the condition is satisfied, the display control means performs display control for displaying the game points that are equal to or less than the predetermined number on the effect display unit (FIG. 9). (See Pattern 3 and Pattern 4).

  According to such a configuration, if the number of game points is equal to or less than a predetermined number, game points are displayed on the effect display unit, so that the player can continue the game as it is without noticing the state where there are few remaining game points. Can be prevented.

(B-5) In the gaming system according to (B-3) or (B-4),
Further comprising conversion means for converting predetermined points into the game points,
The condition success / failure determination means determines that the condition is satisfied when the score is equal to or less than a predetermined number (see FIG. 7).
The display control execution means executes display control for displaying the score that has become the predetermined number or less on the effect display unit when the condition success / failure determination means determines that the condition is satisfied (“holding”). "The remaining points are displayed").

  According to such a configuration, if the score is equal to or less than the predetermined number, the score is displayed on the effect display unit, so that the player can continue the game as it is without noticing the state where the score is low. Can be prevented.

(B-6) In the gaming system according to any one of (B-3) to (B-5), when a recording medium (gaming card) on which information capable of specifying the gaming value is recorded is received Game value storage means for storing the game value (storage area “balance” on the CU side in FIG. 12);
Game value conversion means (lending button 321) for converting the game value into the game points;
The condition success / failure determining means determines that the condition is satisfied when the value of the gaming value is equal to or less than a predetermined value (see FIG. 7).
The display control execution means executes display control for displaying the gaming value that has become equal to or smaller than the predetermined size on the effect display unit when the condition success / failure determination means determines that the condition is satisfied. (The message “Balance balance is small” is displayed.)

  According to such a configuration, the game value is displayed on the effect display section when the game value is equal to or less than a predetermined value, so that the player can continue to play the game without noticing that the game value is low. Can be prevented.

  (B-7) In the gaming system according to (B-3) to (B-6), the effect display unit is configured to execute display control for displaying the game information on the effect display unit. Accordingly, the game information is displayed in addition to the effect information (see pattern 4 in FIG. 9).

  According to such a configuration, since the game information is displayed without completely disappearing the displayed performance information, the performance effect by the performance information can be maintained.

  (B-8) In the gaming system according to (B-3) to (B-6), the effect display unit is configured to execute display control for displaying the game information on the effect display unit. Accordingly, the game information is displayed instead of the effect information (see pattern 3 in FIG. 9).

  According to such a configuration, the game information is displayed instead of the effect information that has been displayed, so that it is possible to make the player pay attention to the switched and displayed game information.

(B-9) In the gaming system according to (B-1) (B-3) to (B-8),
The gaming machine is
Game point storage means for storing the game points (game ball counter in FIG. 12);
A game point display section (game ball number display 29);
Game point display control means (main control part 161) for displaying the game points on the game point display part based on the storage of the game point storage part.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine includes the gaming point display unit, and the display control is performed by the gaming machine that stores the gaming point and relates to the variation of the gaming point. Therefore, the gaming point is used in the game. When subtracted or added by game, the updated game point can be immediately reflected on the game point display unit.

(C-1) The present invention relates to a gaming machine (P 2) that gives a predetermined gaming point by the occurrence of a prize, and a gaming value (card balance, A gaming system comprising a gaming device (CU3) that enables gaming on the gaming machine using a storage ball or the like,
The gaming machine is
A variable display unit (variable display unit of the variable display device 278) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information;
Game control means (main control unit 161) that can be controlled to a state advantageous to the player (big hit state) when the result of the variable display unit becomes a specific display result (both eyes);
A game information display unit (display 54) for displaying game information (card balance, game points, points score, etc.) stored in the game device;
The gaming device includes display control means (display control unit 350) for executing display control for displaying the game information on the game information display unit,
When the game machine displays a condition for displaying effect information (such as the big hit screens of patterns 1 and 2 in FIG. 8) related to the display of the variable display unit different from the game information on the game information display unit (a big hit) Generation, reach occurrence), and production information display control means (production control unit 151, see FIG. 8) for executing display control for displaying the production information on the game information display unit.

  According to such a configuration, since the gaming machine includes the game information display unit for displaying the gaming information stored in the gaming device, it is possible to provide information that is highly convenient for the player in the gaming machine. In addition, when the condition for displaying the effect information on the game information display unit is established, the effect information is displayed on the game information display unit. Therefore, when the condition is satisfied, the game information display unit displays not only the game information but also the game information. It can be used for display of effects, and while it is possible to display game information, it is possible to perform game effects at an effective timing.

(C-2) The present invention provides a gaming device (CU3) for giving a predetermined game point by the occurrence of a winning and enabling a game using a game value (card balance, stored ball, etc.) owned by the player. ) That is communicably connected to the game machine (P 2),
A variable display unit (variable display unit of the variable display device 278) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information;
Game control means (main control unit 161) that can be controlled to a state advantageous to the player (big hit state) when the result of the variable display unit becomes a specific display result (both eyes);
A game information display unit (display 54) for displaying game information (card balance, number of games, number of points, etc.) stored in the game device;
When a condition for displaying effect information related to the display of the variable display unit different from the game information is satisfied (occurrence of big hit, reach), display control for displaying the effect information on the game information display unit is executed. Effect information display control means (effect control unit 151, see FIG. 8).

  According to such a configuration, since the gaming machine includes the game information display unit for displaying the gaming information stored in the gaming device, it is possible to provide information that is highly convenient for the player in the gaming machine. In addition, when the condition for displaying the effect information on the game information display unit is established, the effect information is displayed on the game information display unit. Therefore, when the condition is satisfied, the game information display unit displays not only the game information but also the game information. It can be used for display of effects, and while it is possible to display game information, it is possible to perform game effects at an effective timing.

(C-3) In the gaming system according to (C-1),
Condition success / failure determining means (S1421 in FIG. 7) for determining success / failure of a condition for displaying effect information relating to display of the variable display part different from the game information on the game information display part.

  According to such a configuration, success / failure of the condition for displaying the effect information is determined, and when it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the effect information is displayed on the game information display unit. The condition establishment determining means may be provided on the gaming machine side or on the gaming device side.

(C-4) In the gaming system according to (C-3), the condition success / failure determination means determines that the condition is satisfied when the gaming machine is in an advantageous state for the player (the occurrence of a big hit) Judgment),
The display control execution means executes display control for displaying effect information relating to the advantageous state on the game information display section when the condition success / failure determination means determines that the condition is satisfied (see FIG. 8).

  (C-5) In the gaming system according to (C-1), (C-3), and (C-4), the game information display unit is a display for displaying the effect information on the game information display unit. As the control is executed, the effect information is displayed in addition to the game information (see pattern 1 in FIG. 8).

  According to such a configuration, the game information that has been displayed is displayed completely without disappearing, so that the game information can be continuously provided.

  (C-6) (C-1) (C-3) In the game system according to (C-4), the game information display unit is a display for displaying the effect information on the game information display unit. As the control is executed, the effect information is displayed instead of the game information (see pattern 2 in FIG. 8).

  According to such a configuration, since the effect information is displayed instead of the displayed game information, the player can be made to pay attention to the effect information displayed by switching.

(C-7) In the gaming system according to (C-1) (C-3) to (C-6),
The gaming machine is
Game point storage means for storing the game points (game ball counter in FIG. 12);
A game point display section (game ball number display 29);
Game point display control means (main control part 161) for displaying the game points on the game point display part based on the storage of the game point storage part.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine includes the gaming point display unit, and the display control is performed by the gaming machine that stores the gaming point and relates to the variation of the gaming point. Therefore, the gaming point is used in the game. When subtracted or added by game, the updated game point can be immediately reflected on the game point display unit.

(D-1) The present invention relates to a gaming machine (P 2) that gives a predetermined gaming point when a winning occurs, and a gaming value (card balance, A gaming system comprising a gaming device (CU3) that enables gaming on the gaming machine using a storage ball or the like,
The gaming machine is
Game point storage means for storing the game points (game ball counter in FIG. 12);
Conversion operation means (counting button 28) for converting the gaming points into predetermined points;
Specific means for specifying the amount of change of the game points (additional ball counter, subtraction ball counter, counting ball counter in FIG. 12);
Update information (number of balls to be added in FIG. 12) that can specify the amount of change together with a communication number (serial number) for confirming whether communication between the gaming device and the gaming machine is properly performed or not. Update information transmission means (payout control unit 171) for transmitting the number of subtraction balls, the number of balls counted) to the gaming device;
Between the transmission of the update information and the transmission of the next update information, the change amount specified by the specifying unit is stored as the current change amount (the latest game machine information in FIG. 12), and the current change amount after transmission is stored. Change amount storage means (the latest game table information and the previous game table information storage area in FIG. 12) for storing the change amount as the previous change amount (previous game table information in FIG. 12),
The gaming device is:
Storage means for storing the game points (storage area for the number of game balls on the CU side in FIG. 12);
A score storage means for storing the score (storage area of the number of cards on the CU side in FIG. 12);
While receiving the update information, transmitting predetermined information including the communication number (status information request) to the gaming machine,
Game point update means (CU control unit 323; see FIG. 12) for updating the game points stored in the storage means according to the update information;
A score update means (CU control unit 323; see FIG. 12) for updating the score stored in the score storage means based on the operation of the conversion operation means;
The communication number transmitted from the gaming machine is added and updated, and information including the updated communication number is transmitted to the gaming machine, and the communication number last transmitted or received is stored (see FIG. 57 and the like). ),
The gaming machine adds and updates the communication number transmitted from the gaming device, transmits the updated communication number, stores the last transmitted communication number, and exchanges the communication number with the gaming device. At the start of communication, the last transmitted communication number is transmitted, and update information (recovery detailed response) that can specify both the current change amount and the previous change amount is transmitted (see FIG. 57 etc.),
The gaming device has a larger communication number transmitted from the gaming machine at the start of communication with the gaming machine than the last transmitted or received communication number. In some cases, the game point stored in the storage means is corrected using the current change amount and the previous change amount specified by the received update information (FIG. 59 (P serial number is better). On the other hand, when the communication number transmitted from the gaming machine is a small value or the same value, the storage means stores the current change amount specified by the received update information. The game points being played are corrected (FIG. 57 (CU serial number and P stand serial number are the same), FIG. 58 (CU serial number is larger)).

  According to such a configuration, when communication between the gaming device and the gaming machine is resumed, data that should have been transmitted on the transmitting side at the end of the previous communication is not received on the receiving side, The inconvenience of communication progressing can be solved.

  Furthermore, it is possible for the player to convert the game points obtained by the game into points, and to confuse players who are used to the conventional game system for counting the game media obtained by the game. The game using the game points can be provided.

(D-2) The present invention is communicably connected to a gaming machine (P 2) that gives a predetermined gaming point when a winning occurs, and uses a player's own gaming value (card balance, accumulated ball, etc.) A gaming device (CU3) that enables gaming on the gaming machine,
Storage means for storing the game points (storage area for the number of game balls on the CU side in FIG. 12);
A point storage means for storing the points converted from the gaming points based on the detection of a predetermined conversion operation (detection of the operation of the counting button 28) (the storage area of the card holding number on the CU side in FIG. 12); ,
A score update unit (CU control unit 323; see FIG. 12) for updating the score stored in the score storage unit based on the conversion operation;
Transmit predetermined information (status information request) including a communication number (serial number) for confirming whether or not communication between the gaming device and the gaming machine is properly performed to the gaming machine. At the same time, it receives update information (the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of counted balls in FIG.
Including game point update means (CU control unit 323; see FIG. 12) for updating the game points stored in the storage means based on the update information;
The communication number transmitted from the gaming machine is added and updated, and information including the communication number updated and updated is transmitted to the gaming machine, and the communication number last transmitted or received is stored (see FIG. 57 and the like). ) Further, at the start of communication with the gaming machine, the gaming machine receives the communication number last transmitted, and the amount of change in the score at the gaming machine since the previous transmission of update information Update information (recovery details response) that can identify both the current change amount and the previous change amount that was transmitted as update information before the current change amount (see FIG. 57 and the like)
The gaming device has a larger communication number transmitted from the gaming machine at the start of communication with the gaming machine than the last transmitted or received communication number. In some cases, the game point stored in the storage means is corrected using the current change amount and the previous change amount specified by the received update information (FIG. 59 (P serial number is better). On the other hand, when the communication number transmitted from the gaming machine is a small value or the same value, the storage means stores the current change amount specified by the received update information. The game points being played are corrected (FIG. 57 (CU serial number and P stand serial number are the same), FIG. 58 (CU serial number is larger)).

  According to such a configuration, when communication between the gaming device and the gaming machine is resumed, data that should have been transmitted on the transmitting side at the end of the previous communication is not received on the receiving side, The inconvenience of communication progressing can be solved.

  Furthermore, it is possible for the player to convert the game points obtained by the game into points, and to confuse players who are used to the conventional game system for counting the game media obtained by the game. The game using the game points can be provided.

(D-3) In the gaming system according to (D-1),
The change amount storage means accumulates and stores the change amount of the holding point specified by the specifying means as the current change amount until the communication is started after the communication impossible state occurs (FIG. 70 (Game Memorize game table information changed by
The gaming machine transmits, to the gaming device, cumulative update information that can identify the current change amount accumulated in the change amount storage means when communication is started after the incommunicable state occurs. (FIG. 70 (At the time of retransmission, the change amount of the game ball since the previous transmission of the status information response is also transmitted)),
The gaming device updates the gaming points stored in the storage unit based on the cumulative update information (see FIG. 70).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to update the holding point reflecting the change amount of the holding point that has been changed from when the communication failure state occurs until communication is started.

  The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

Claims (2)

A gaming machine that grants a predetermined gaming point by the occurrence of a prize, and a gaming device that is communicably connected to the gaming machine and that enables gaming on the gaming machine using the gaming value owned by the player A gaming system comprising:
The gaming machine is
A variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information;
Game control means capable of controlling in a state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display section is a specific display result;
An effect display unit for displaying effect information related to the display of the variable display unit,
The game device performs display control for displaying the game information on the effect display unit when a condition for displaying game information different from the effect information on the effect display unit is satisfied. A gaming system including means. A gaming machine that is communicatively connected to a gaming device for giving a predetermined gaming point upon occurrence of a prize and enabling a game using a gaming value owned by the player,
A variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information;
Game control means capable of controlling in a state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display section is a specific display result;
An effect display unit for displaying effect information related to the display of the variable display unit,
When the display control for displaying the game information by the game device on the effect display unit is executed due to establishment of a condition for displaying game information different from the effect information, the effect display unit is executed. A gaming machine capable of displaying the game information on the effect display unit.

Images